SlideShare a Scribd company logo
HP ProBook 640 G2 Notebook PC
HP ProBook 645 G2 Notebook PC
HP ProBook 650 G2 Notebook PC
HP ProBook 655 G2 Notebook PC
Maintenance and Service Guide
© Copyright 2015 HP Development Company,
L.P.
AMD and AMD Litho Pro are trademarks of
Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Bluetooth is a
trademark owned by its proprietor and used by
Hewlett-Packard Company under license. Intel,
Skylake, and Core are trademarks of Intel
Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
Microsoft and Windows are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
Product notice
This guide describes features that are common
to most models. Some features may not be
available on your computer.
Not all features are available in all editions of
Windows 8. This computer may require
upgraded and/or separately purchased
hardware, drivers and/or software to take full
advantage of Windows 8 functionality. See
http://www.microsoft.com for details.
The information contained herein is subject to
change without notice. The only warranties for
HP products and services are set forth in the
express warranty statements accompanying
such products and services. Nothing herein
should be construed as constituting an
additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for
technical or editorial errors or omissions
contained herein.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com.
Manufactured under license from DTS
Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and
the Symbol together are registered
trademarks, and DTS Sound+ is a trademark of
DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved .
First Edition: December 2015
Document Part Number: 839485-001
Important Notice about Customer Self-Repair Parts
CAUTION: Your computer includes Customer Self-Repair parts and parts that should only be accessed by an
authorized service provider. See Chapter 5, "Removal and replacement procedures for Customer Self-Repair
parts," for details. Accessing parts described in Chapter 6, "Removal and replacement procedures for
Authorized Service Provider only parts," can damage the computer or void your warranty.
iii
iv Important Notice about Customer Self-Repair Parts
Safety warning notice
WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the device, do not place the
device directly on your lap or obstruct the device air vents. Use the device only on a hard, flat surface. Do not
allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or
clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as
pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The device and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible
surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology
Equipment (IEC 60950-1).
v
vi Safety warning notice
Table of contents
1 Product description ....................................................................................................................................... 1
2 External component identification .................................................................................................................. 6
Right ....................................................................................................................................................................... 6
Left ......................................................................................................................................................................... 8
Display .................................................................................................................................................................... 9
Top ........................................................................................................................................................................ 10
TouchPad ........................................................................................................................................... 10
Lights ................................................................................................................................................. 11
Buttons, speakers, and fingerprint reader ........................................................................................ 12
Special function keys ........................................................................................................................ 14
Using the hot keys ............................................................................................................................. 15
Bottom ................................................................................................................................................................. 17
Front ..................................................................................................................................................................... 17
Rear ...................................................................................................................................................................... 19
Locating system information .............................................................................................................................. 19
3 Illustrated parts catalog .............................................................................................................................. 21
Computer major components .............................................................................................................................. 21
Display assembly subcomponents ...................................................................................................................... 27
Mass storage devices ........................................................................................................................................... 29
Miscellaneous parts ............................................................................................................................................. 31
4 Removal and replacement procedures preliminary requirements .................................................................... 32
Tools required ...................................................................................................................................................... 32
Service considerations ......................................................................................................................................... 32
Plastic parts ....................................................................................................................................... 32
Cables and connectors ...................................................................................................................... 33
Drive handling ................................................................................................................................... 33
Grounding guidelines ........................................................................................................................................... 34
Electrostatic discharge damage ........................................................................................................ 34
Packaging and transporting guidelines .......................................................................... 35
Workstation guidelines ................................................................................................... 35
Equipment guidelines ..................................................................................................... 36
vii
5 Removal and replacement procedures for Customer Self-Repair parts ............................................................. 37
Component replacement procedures .................................................................................................................. 37
Service door ....................................................................................................................................... 37
Battery ............................................................................................................................................... 38
Hard drive .......................................................................................................................................... 39
Solid-state drive (select products only) ............................................................................................ 41
WWAN module (select products only) ............................................................................................... 42
WLAN module .................................................................................................................................... 44
Optical drive ....................................................................................................................................... 46
Keyboard ........................................................................................................................................... 48
Memory .............................................................................................................................................. 51
6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts ................................................... 54
Component replacement procedures .................................................................................................................. 54
Hinge cover ........................................................................................................................................ 55
Base enclosure .................................................................................................................................. 57
System board .................................................................................................................................... 59
Fan and heat sink assembly .............................................................................................................. 61
Optical drive board ............................................................................................................................ 64
Top cover and TouchPad .................................................................................................................... 65
RTC battery ........................................................................................................................................ 68
Speaker .............................................................................................................................................. 70
Power button board .......................................................................................................................... 71
Fingerprint reader (select products only) ......................................................................................... 72
Smart card reader .............................................................................................................................. 74
Near Field Communication module ................................................................................................... 76
Audio board ....................................................................................................................................... 78
Serial .................................................................................................................................................. 80
Display assembly ................................................................................................................................................. 82
7 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start in Windows 10 ........................................................................ 88
Using Computer Setup ......................................................................................................................................... 88
Starting Computer Setup .................................................................................................................. 88
Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup ................................................................................... 88
Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup ................................................................................. 89
Updating the BIOS ............................................................................................................................. 90
Determining the BIOS version ......................................................................................... 90
Downloading a BIOS update ........................................................................................... 90
Changing the boot order using the f9 prompt .................................................................................. 91
TPM BIOS settings (select products only) ........................................................................................................... 91
viii
Using HP Sure Start (select products only) ......................................................................................................... 92
8 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start in Windows 8.1 ....................................................................... 93
Using Computer Setup ......................................................................................................................................... 93
Starting Computer Setup .................................................................................................................. 93
Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup ................................................................................... 93
Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup ................................................................................. 94
Updating the BIOS ............................................................................................................................. 95
Determining the BIOS version ......................................................................................... 95
Downloading a BIOS update ........................................................................................... 95
Changing the boot order using the f9 prompt .................................................................................. 96
TPM BIOS settings (select products only) ........................................................................................................... 96
Using HP Sure Start (select products only) ......................................................................................................... 97
9 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start in Windows 7 ......................................................................... 98
Using Computer Setup ......................................................................................................................................... 98
Starting Computer Setup .................................................................................................................. 98
Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup ................................................................................... 98
Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup ................................................................................. 99
Updating the BIOS ........................................................................................................................... 100
Determining the BIOS version ...................................................................................... 100
Downloading a BIOS update ......................................................................................... 100
Changing the boot order using the f9 prompt ................................................................................ 101
TPM BIOS settings (select products only) ......................................................................................................... 101
Using HP Sure Start (select products only) ....................................................................................................... 102
10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) ................................................................................................... 103
Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device .................................................................. 103
11 Backup and recovery ................................................................................................................................ 105
Creating recovery media and backups .............................................................................................................. 105
Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) ....................................................................... 105
Using Windows tools ......................................................................................................................................... 106
Restore and recovery ......................................................................................................................................... 107
Recovering using HP Recovery Manager ........................................................................................ 107
What you need to know before you get started ........................................................... 107
Using the HP Recovery partition (select products only) .............................................. 108
Using HP Recovery media to recover ............................................................................ 108
Changing the computer boot order .............................................................................. 109
Removing the HP Recovery partition (select products only) ....................................... 110
ix
12 Backup and recovery in Windows 8.1 ......................................................................................................... 111
Backing up your information ............................................................................................................................. 111
Performing a system recovery .......................................................................................................................... 111
Using the Windows recovery tools .................................................................................................. 111
Using f11 recovery tools ................................................................................................................. 112
Using Windows operating system media (purchased separately) ................................................. 113
Using Windows Refresh or Windows Reset .................................................................................... 113
Using HP Software Setup ................................................................................................................ 113
13 Backup and recovery in Windows 7 ............................................................................................................ 114
Creating recovery media and backups .............................................................................................................. 114
Guidelines ........................................................................................................................................ 114
Creating recovery media with HP Recovery Disc Creator ............................................................... 114
Creating recovery media ............................................................................................... 115
Backing up your information .......................................................................................................... 115
Performing a system recovery .......................................................................................................................... 116
Using the Windows recovery tools .................................................................................................. 116
Using f11 recovery tools (select products only) ............................................................................. 117
Using Windows 7 operating system media ..................................................................................... 117
14 Specifications .......................................................................................................................................... 119
Computer specifications .................................................................................................................................... 119
Hard drive specifications ................................................................................................................................... 120
Solid-state drive specifications ......................................................................................................................... 120
15 Power cord set requirements .................................................................................................................... 122
Requirements for all countries .......................................................................................................................... 122
Requirements for specific countries and regions ............................................................................................. 122
16 Statement of memory volatility ................................................................................................................ 124
Nonvolatile memory usage ............................................................................................................................... 128
Questions and answers ..................................................................................................................................... 130
Using HP Sure Start (select models only) .......................................................................................................... 131
17 Recycling ................................................................................................................................................ 132
Index ........................................................................................................................................................... 133
x
1 Product description
Category Description
Product Name HP 640 G2 Notebook PC
HP 645 G2 Notebook PC
HP 650 G2 Notebook PC
HP 655 G2 Notebook PC
Processors HP 640 and HP 650 products:
Intel Skylake Core i3-6100U Dual Core 2.3GHz SoC BGA
Intel Skylake Core i5-6200U Dual Core 2.3/2.8GHz SoC BGA
Intel Skylake Core i5-6300U Dual Core 2.4/3.0GHz SoC BGA
Intel Skylake Core i7-6600U Dual Core 2.6/3.4GHz SoC BGA
HP 645 and HP 655 products:
AMD Carrizo APU BGA ULV
A6-Pro-8500B with Radeon R5 Graphics
A8-Pro-8600B with Radeon R6 Graphics
A10-Pro-8700B with Radeon R6 Graphics
Chipset Intel Skylake Chipset—The chipset is integrated with the processor (PCH-
LP).
AMD Carrizo—The chipset is integrated with the processor.
Graphics Intel UMA Graphics (GT2) with shared video memory
AMD (128-bit) w/2 GB GDDR5 (128Mb x 32, 1.35V, 5Gbps, Qty 4)
AMD Integrated UMA graphics
Panel Anti-glare panels for 14” products:
14.0" HD AG SVA 45% CG 220 nits eDP 1.2 flat (1366x768)
14.0" HD AG SVA 45% CG 220 nits eDP 1.2 flat (1366x768) with camera
14.0" HD AG SVA 45% CG 220 nits eDP 1.2 flat (1366x768) with WWAN
14.0" HD AG SVA 45% CG 220 nits eDP 1.2 flat (1366x768) with camera and
with WWAN
14.0" FHD AG SVA 60% CG 300 nits eDP 1.3 + PSR slim flat (1920x1080)
14.0" FHD AG SVA 60% CG 300 nits eDP 1.3 + PSR slim flat (1920x1080)
with camera
14.0" FHD AG SVA 60% CG 300 nits eDP 1.3 + PSR slim flat (1920x1080)
with WWAN
14.0" FHD AG SVA 60% CG 300 nits eDP 1.3 + PSR slim flat(1920x1080) with
camera and WWAN
1
Category Description
14.0" FHD Slim eDP SVA 60% 300 nits (1920 x 1080) Touch with camera and
with WWAN
Anti-glare panels for 15" products with LED backlight:
15.6" HD AG SVA 45% CG 220 nits eDP 1.2 flat (1366x768)
15.6" HD AG SVA 45% CG 220 nits eDP 1.2 flat (1366x768) with camera
15.6" HD AG SVA 45% CG 220 nits eDP 1.2 flat (1366x768) with WWAN
15.6" HD AG SVA 45% CG 220 nits eDP 1.2 flat (1366x768) with camera and
with WWAN
15.6" FHD AG SVA 60% CG 300 nits eDP 1.3 + PSR slim flat (1920x1080)
15.6" FHD AG SVA 60% CG 300 nits eDP 1.3 + PSR slim flat (1920x1080)
with camera
15.6" FHD AG SVA 60% CG 300 nits eDP 1.3 + PSR slim flat (1920x1080)
with WWAN
15.6" FHD AG SVA 60% CG 300 nits eDP 1.3 + PSR slim flat(1920x1080) with
camera and WWAN
14.0" FHD Slim eDP SVA 60% 300 nits (1920 x 1080) Touch with camera and
with WWAN
Memory DDR4 PC4-17000 (2133) SODIMMS Memory Module—Supports Dual
Channel Memory up to 16 GB.
4096 MB Total System Memory (4096 MB x 1)
8192 MB Total System Memory (4096 MB x 2)
8192 MB Total System Memory (8192 MB x 1)
12288 MB Total System Memory (8192 MB + 4096 MB)
16384 MB Total System Memory (8192 MB x 2)
Hard drive Supports SATA3, 7mm, 2.5" HDDs:
HDD 1TB 5400RPM 7mm SATA
HDD 500GB 5400RPM 7mm Hybrid SATA 8GB NAND
HDD 500GB 7200RPM 7mm FIPS SATA 8GB Opal2
HDD 500GB 7200RPM 7mm SATA
HDD 500GB 7200RPM 7mm self-encrypting drive SATA Opal2
Solid-state drive SSD 128GB 2.5in SATA-3 TLC
SSD 128GB 2280 M2 SATA-3 TLC
SSD 180GB 2280 M2 SATA-3
SSD 180GB 2280 M2 SATA-3 self-encrypting drive Opal2
SSD 240GB 2280 M2 SATA-3
SSD 256GB 2.5in SATA-3 TLC
SSD 256GB 2280 M2 PCIe-3x4 SS
SSD 256GB 2280 M2 PCIe-3x4 SS NVMe
SSD 256GB 2280 M2 SATA-3 self-encrypting drive Opal2
SSD 256GB 2280 M2 SATA-3 TLC
2 Chapter 1 Product description
Category Description
SSD 512GB 2280 M2 PCIe-3x4 DS
SSD 512GB 2280 M2 PCIe-3x4 DS NVMe
SSD 512GB 2280 M2 PCIe-3x4 SS NVMe
SSD 512GB 2280 M2 SATA-3 self-encrypting drive Opal2
SSD 512GB 2280 M2 SATA-3 TLC
Optical drive SATA-3 7 mm 2.5 fixed optical drives:
DVD-ROM (defeatured combo)
DVD+/-RW SuperMulti DL
Blu-ray ROM DVD+/-RW SuperMulti DL
Audio and video HD Audio with DTS Sound+
Microphone (Dual Array) only for products without a webcam
Microphone (Dual Array) only for products with a webcam
Camera (720p)
Stereo Speakers (2)
Ethernet Intel I219LM (Jacksonville-LM) 10/100/1000 Ethernet, with iAMT
Intel I219V (Jacksonville-V) 10/100/1000 Ethernet, no iAMT
Wireless LAN WLAN Broadcom Luffy 943228 abgn 2x2 + BT 4 LE PCIe+USB NGFF 2230
MOW
Broadcom Nami 43142 bgn 1x1 + BT 4 LE PCIe+USB NGFF 1630 MOW
WLAN Intel 8260NGW M Snowfield Peak ac 2x2 + BT 4.1 LE PCIe+USB NGFF
2230 WW
WLAN Realtek Shanks RTL8188EE bgn 1x1 PCI-e NGFF 2230 M.2 WW (NB)
WLAN 11AC 7265NV M.2 D0 MOW
WLAN 11ac 2x2 INT 8260NGW SnfP2
WLAN 11ac INT 3165 M.2 MOW
WLAN 11 ABGN+BT4 x 2.2 LUFFY INDO
Wireless WAN (select products only) WWAN Foxconn Amstel LTE/EVDO/HSPA+ w/GPS M.2
WWAN T77W595 LTE M.2 w/GPS
WWAN Huawei Wrangler MU736 HSPA+ w/GPS M.2
External media cards SD Media Reader slot supports SD, SDHC, and SDXC.
Ports VGA (Dsub 15 pin) supporting 1920 x 1200 external resolution @ 60Hz
Hot Plug / Unplug and auto detect
DisplayPort 1.2
(1) USB Type C Charging Port
(2) USB 3.0 Port (1 Charging)
RJ-45 / Ethernet
Docking connector
3
Category Description
Headphone / Microphone (Combo jack)
AC Port (4.5mm)
Docking Quest 2 dock support
Keyboard/pointing devices HP Advanced Keyboard
Touchpad, Spill-resistant with drain
Touchpad, Spill-resistant with drain, DuraKeys and backlit
Dual Point, Spill-resistant with drain, DuraKeys and backlit
Power requirements Battery:
3-cell HP Long Life Prismatic 48 WHr ( 4.21 Ahr ) Battery
AC adapter:
45 Watt Smart nPFC 3 pin RC 4.5mm connector - non slim
45 Watt Smart nPFC 3 pin RC 4.5mm connector - non slim 2 prong
65 Watt Smart nPFC 3 pin RC 4.5mm connector
65 Watt Smart nPFC EM 4.5mm connector
90 W PFC S-3P 4.5mm connector (select 15” products only)
Power Cord (localized):
2-wire plug - 1m
3-wire plug - 1.8m
3-wire plug - 1m
Security Supports Security Lock
TPM 1.2 (Infineon; soldered down)
Fingerprint Reader (select products only)
Integrated Smart Card Reader (Active)
Preboot Authentication (Password, Smart Card)
Operating system Operating System Version:
● Windows 7: SP1
● Windows 8.1: Update
● Windows 10: Threshold 2
Preinstalled:
● Win 7 Pro 32
● Win 7 Pro 32 - MSNA
● Win 7 Pro 64
● Win 8.1 CH 64 ( CPPP )
● Win 8.1 Core for Higher Education ML 64
● Win 8.1 EM 64
● Win 8.1 EM 64
4 Chapter 1 Product description
Category Description
● Win 8.1 64 High-End Emerging Markets
● Win 8.1 64 High-End Multi-Language
● Win 8.1 PRO 64
● Win 10 Home 64
● Win 10 Home 64 Single Language
● Win 10 Home 64 CPPP
● Win 10 Home 64 High-end
● Win 10 Home 64 High-end Single Language
● Win 10 Pro 64
● Win 10 Pro 64 Downgrade Win 7 32
● Win 10 Pro 64 Downgrade Win 7 64
● FreeDOS 2.0
● NeoKylin Linux 64 bit
Serviceability End user replaceable parts:
Memory
Optical Drive
Hard Drive
Solid-state Drive
Battery
AC adapter
Fan/Heat sink assembly
Speaker
WWAN (select products only)
WLAN
5
2 External component identification
Right
Component Description
(1) Dual-Mode DisplayPort Connects an optional digital display device, such as a high-
performance monitor or projector.
(2) USB 3.0 charging (powered) port Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse,
external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Standard USB ports
will not charge all USB devices or will charge using a low
current. Some USB devices require power and require you to use
a powered port.
NOTE: USB charging ports can also charge select models of
cell phones and MP3 players, even when the computer is off.
(3) SIM card slot (select products only) Supports a wireless subscriber identity module (SIM) card.
(4) Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in (microphone)
combo jack
Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones,
earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an
optional headset microphone. This jack does not support
optional microphone-only devices.
6 Chapter 2 External component identification
Component Description
WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the
volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset.
For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory,
Safety, and Environmental Notices.
To access this guide:
1. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select
the HP Support Assistant app.
– or –
Click the question mark icon in the taskbar.
2. Select My PC, select the Specifications tab, and then
select User Guides.
NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer
speakers are disabled.
(5) USB Type-C (charging) port Connects any USB device with a Type-C connector.
NOTE: USB Type-C ports charge products such as cell phones,
laptops, tablets, and MP3 players, even when the computer is
off. Also, some USB Type-C ports connect DisplayPort, VGA,
HDMI and other video devices to provide video output.
NOTE: Adapters (purchased separately) may be required.
(6) Memory card reader Reads optional memory cards that store, manage, share, or
access information.
(7) USB 3.0 port Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse,
external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub.
(8) RJ-45 (network) jack/status lights Connects a network cable.
● Green (left): The network is connected.
● Amber (right): Activity is occurring on the network.
(9) Docking port Connects an optional docking device.
(10) Power connector Connects an AC adapter.
Right 7
Left
NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer.
Component Description
(1) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer.
NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but
it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or
stolen.
(2) Vent Enables airflow to cool internal components.
NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool
internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for
the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation.
(3) Optical drive (select products only) Depending on your computer model, reads an optical disc or
reads and writes to an optical disc.
(4) Optical drive light Green: The optical drive is in use.
Off: The optical drive is off.
(5) Optical drive eject button Releases the optical drive disc tray.
(6) Smart card reader Supports optional smart cards.
8 Chapter 2 External component identification
Display
Component Description
(1) WLAN antennas* Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local
area networks (WLANs).
(2) WWAN antennas* Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless wide
area networks (WWANs).
(3) Internal microphones Record sound.
(4) Webcam light On: The webcam is in use.
(5) Webcam (select products only) Records video and captures photographs. Some models allow you to
video conference and chat online using streaming video.
To use the webcam:
▲ Type camera in the taskbar search box, and then select
Camera.
(6) Near Field Communication (NFC) tapping area*
(select products only)
Tap another NFC-enabled device to the NFC tapping area to transfer
files.
*The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the
antennas free from obstructions.
For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or
region.
To access this guide:
1. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app.
– or –
Click the question mark icon in the taskbar.
Display 9
Component Description
2. Select My PC, select the Specifications tab, and then select User Guides.
Top
TouchPad
Component Description
(1) Pointing stick (select products only) Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen.
(2) Left pointing stick button (select products only) Functions like the left button on an external mouse.
(3) TouchPad light ● On: The TouchPad is off.
● Off: The TouchPad is on.
(4) TouchPad zone Reads your finger gestures to move the pointer or activate
items on the screen.
(5) Left TouchPad button Functions like the left button on an external mouse.
(6) Right pointing stick button (select products
only)
Functions like the right button on an external mouse.
(7) Right TouchPad button Functions like the right button on an external mouse.
10 Chapter 2 External component identification
Lights
Component Description
(1) Power light ● On: The computer is on.
● Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state, a power-saving
state. The computer shuts off power to the display and
other unneeded components.
● Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Hibernation is a
power-saving state that uses the least amount of power.
(2) Microphone mute light ● Amber: microphone sound is off.
● Off: microphone sound is on.
(3) Num lock light On: Num lock is on.
(4) Wireless light On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area
network (WLAN) device and/or a Bluetooth device, is on.
NOTE: On some models, the wireless light is amber when all
wireless devices are off.
(5) Mute light ● Amber: Computer sound is off.
● Off: Computer sound is on.
(6) Caps lock light On: Caps lock is on, which switches the key input to all capital
letters.
Top 11
Buttons, speakers, and fingerprint reader
Component Description
(1) Power button ● When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the
computer.
● When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate
Sleep.
● When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button
briefly to exit Sleep.
● When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button
briefly to exit Hibernation.
CAUTION: Pressing and holding down the power button results
in the loss of unsaved information.
If the computer has stopped responding and shutdown
procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at
least 5 seconds to turn off the computer.
To learn more about your power settings, see your power
options.
▲ Type power in the taskbar search box, and then select
Power and sleep settings.
– or –
Right-click the Start button, and then select Power
Options.
(2) Speakers Produce sound.
(3) Wireless button Turns the wireless feature on or off but does not establish a
wireless connection.
12 Chapter 2 External component identification
Component Description
A wireless network must be set up before a wireless connection is
possible.
(4) Volume mute button (select products only) Mutes and restores speaker sound.
(5) Fingerprint reader (select products only) Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows, instead of a password
logon.
Top 13
Special function keys
NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer.
Component Description
(1) esc key Displays system information when pressed in combination with
the fn key.
(2) fn key Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in
combination with a function key, the num lock key, the esc key,
or the fn+b.
See Using the hot keys on page 15
(3) Windows key Opens the Start menu.
NOTE: Pressing the Windows key again will close the Start
menu.
(4) Embedded numeric keypad A numeric keypad superimposed over the keyboard alphabet
keys that enables you to add, subtract, and perform other
numeric tasks. When num lock is on, the keypad can be used like
an external numeric keypad.
(5) Windows application key Displays options for a selected object.
(6) num lock key Turns the embedded numeric keypad on and off.
14 Chapter 2 External component identification
Component Description
(1) esc key Displays system information when pressed in combination with
the fn key.
(2) fn key Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in
combination with a function key, the num lock key, the esc key,
or the fn+b.
See Using the hot keys on page 15
(3) Windows key Opens the Start menu.
NOTE: Pressing the Windows key again will close the Start
menu.
(4) num lock key Turns the embedded numeric keypad on and off.
(5) Integrated numeric keypad A separate keypad to the right of the alphabet keyboard that
enables you to add, subtract, and perform other numeric tasks.
When num lock is on, the integrated keypad can be used like an
external numeric keypad.
Using the hot keys
To use a hot key:
▲ Press the fn key, and then press the correct function key represented by the icons below.
Press fn+function key Description
Initiates Sleep, which saves your information in system memory. The display and other system components
turn off and power is conserved.
To exit Sleep, briefly press the power button.
CAUTION: To reduce the risk of information loss, save your work before initiating Sleep.
Turns the keyboard backlight off or on.
NOTE: To conserve battery power, turn off this feature.
Top 15
Press fn+function key Description
Decreases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key.
Increases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key.
Decreases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key.
Increases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key.
Mutes the microphone.
16 Chapter 2 External component identification
Bottom
Component Description
(1) Docking station support holes Support an optional docking station.
(2) Vent Enables airflow to cool internal components.
NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool
internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal
for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine
operation.
Front
Component Description
(1) Wireless light On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local
area network (WLAN) device and/or a Bluetooth device, is
on.
NOTE: On some models, the wireless light is amber when
all wireless devices are off.
(2) Power light ● On: The computer is on.
Bottom 17
Component Description
● Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state, a power-
saving state. The computer shuts off power to the
display and other unneeded components.
● Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation.
Hibernation is a power-saving state that uses the
least amount of power.
(3) Battery light When AC power is connected:
● White: The battery charge is greater than 90 percent.
● Amber: The battery charge is from 0 to 90 percent.
● Off: The battery is not charging.
When AC power is disconnected (battery not charging):
● Blinking amber: The battery has reached a low
battery level. When the battery has reached a critical
battery level, the battery light begins blinking
rapidly.
● Off: The battery is not charging.
(4) Drive light ● Blinking white: The hard drive is being accessed.
● Amber: HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the
hard drive.
18 Chapter 2 External component identification
Rear
Component Description
(1) External monitor port Connects an external VGA monitor or projector.
(2) Serial port (select products only) Connects an optional device such as a serial modem,
mouse, or printer.
Locating system information
Important system information is located on the bottom edge of the tablet or on the keyboard base. You may
need the information when travelling internationally or when you contact support:
(1): Serial number
(2): Product number
(3): Model number
(4): Warranty period
Rear 19
Using Windows, briefly press the fn+esc key combination to display the System Information screen, which
provides the product name and serial number of your computer, as well as information about the memory,
processor, BIOS, and keyboard.
20 Chapter 2 External component identification
3 Illustrated parts catalog
Computer major components
NOTE: HP continually improves and changes product parts. For complete and current information on
supported parts for your computer, go to http://partsurfer.hp.com, select your country or region, and then
follow the on-screen instructions.
NOTE: Details about your computer, including model, serial number, product key, and length of warranty,
are on the service tag at the bottom of your computer. See Locating system information on page 19 for
details.
Computer major components 21
Item Component Spare part number
(1) Display
NOTE: For spare part information, see Display assembly subcomponents on page 27.
22 Chapter 3 Illustrated parts catalog
Item Component Spare part number
(2) Hinge covers
For 14” products 840685-001
For 14” products with a touch screen 840686-001
For 15” products 840738-001
For 15” products with a touch screen 840739-001
(3) Keyboard
NOTE: For a detailed list of country codes, see Keyboard on page 48.
Keyboard for 14” products (includes keyboard cable) 840791-001
Backlit keyboard for 14” products (includes keyboard cable and backlight cable) 840800-001
840801-001
Keyboard for 15” products (includes keyboard cable) 841136-001
Backlit keyboard for 15” products ( includes keyboard cable and backlight cable) 841137-001
841145-001
(4) Top cover (includes TouchPad, bracket, and pointing stick (select products only))
Top cover for 14" products with a TouchPad 840719-001
Top cover for 14" products with a TouchPad and pointing stick 840720-001
Top cover for 14" products with a TouchPad, TouchPad on/off button, and TouchPad
bracket
840721-001
Top cover for 14" products with a TouchPad, pointing stick, TouchPad on/off button, and
bracket
845170-001
Top cover for 15" products with a TouchPad 840751-001
Top cover for 15" products with a TouchPad and pointing stick 840752-001
Top cover for 15" products with a TouchPad, TouchPad on/off button, and bracket 840753-001
Top cover for 15" products with a TouchPad, pointing stick, TouchPad on/off button, and
bracket
845172-001
(5) Power button board (includes cable)
For 15" products 840693-001
For 15" products 840744-001
(6) Smart card reader metal shield (included with Smart card reader)
(7) Smart card reader (includes metal shield) 840694-001
(8) RTC battery ( includes cable) 651948-001
(9) TouchPad bracket (included with spare part numbers 840721-001, 840753-001,
845170-001, and 845172-001)
(10) Fan (includes heat sink)
(11) For 14" products with integrated graphics 840662-001
For 15" products with integrated graphics 840732-001
Computer major components 23
Item Component Spare part number
(12) For 15" products with high-quality integrated graphics 840734-001
For 14" products with discrete graphics 840663-001
For 15" products with discrete graphics 840733-001
(13) System board
Discrete memory, Intel i5-6300U processor, and WWAN capability 840712-001
Discrete memory, Intel i5-6300U processor, WWAN capability, and Windows 840712-601
Discrete memory, Intel i7-6300U processor, and WWAN capability 840713-001
Discrete memory, Intel i7-6300U processor, WWAN capability, and Windows 840713-601
UMA memory, AMD A10-8700B processor, and WWAN capability 841494-001
842345-001
UMA memory, AMD A6-8500B processor 841495-001
842346-001
UMA memory, AMD A6-8500B processor, and Windows 841495-601
842346-601
UMA memory, AMD A8-8600B processor, and Windows 841497-001
842348-001
UMA memory, AMD A8-8600B processor, and Windows 841497-601
842348-601
UMA memory, AMD A8-8600B processor, and WWAN capability 841496-001
842347-001
UMA memory, AMD A8-8600B processor, and WWAN capability 841496-001
842347-001
UMA memory, Intel i3-6100U processor 840714-001
UMA memory, Intel i3-6100U processor and Windows 840714-601
UMA memory, Intel i5-6200U processor 840715-001
UMA memory, Intel i5-6200U processor and Windows 840715-601
UMA memory, Intel i5-6200U processor, and WWAN capability 840716-001
UMA memory, Intel i5-6200U processor, WWAN capability, and Windows 840716-601
UMA memory, Intel i5-6300U processor, and WWAN capability 840717-001
UMA memory, Intel i5-6300U processor, and WWAN capability, and Windows 840717-601
UMA memory, Intel i5-6440HQ processor, and WWAN capability 844345-001
UMA memory, Intel i5-6440HQ processor, and WWAN capability, and Windows 844345-601
UMA memory, Intel i7-6600U processor, and WWAN capability 840718-001
UMA memory, Intel i7-6600U processor, and WWAN capability, and Windows 840718-601
24 Chapter 3 Illustrated parts catalog
Item Component Spare part number
UMA memory, Intel i7-6820HQ processor, and WWAN capability 844346-001
UMA memory, Intel i7-6820HQ processor, and WWAN capability, and Windows 844346-601
(14) Fingerprint reader board (includes cable)
For 14" products 840664-001
For 15" products 840735-001
(15) Optical drive board (includes cable)
(16) Speaker (includes cable) 840700-001
(17) Audio board (includes cable) 840692-001
(18) Base enclosure
For 14" products 840657-001
For 15" products 840725-001
(19) Solid-state drive
NOTE: For spare part information, see Mass storage devices on page 29.
(20) Serial port (includes cable) (select products only) 840746-001
(21) Hard drive
NOTE: For spare part information, see Mass storage devices on page 29.
(22) Memory
2GB PC3L 12800 1600MHz shared memory 691739-001
4GB PC3L 12800 1600MHz shared memory 691740-001
8GB PC3L 12800 1600MHz shared memory 693374-001
4GB 2133MHz 1.2v DDR4 shared memory 820569-001
8GB 2133MHz 1.2v DDR4 shared memory 820570-001
(23) WLAN module
Broadcom Nami 43142 bgn 1x1 + BT 4 LE PCIe+USB NGFF 1630 MOW 792608-001
Realtek Shanks RTL8188EE bgn 1x1 PCI-e NGFF 2230 M.2 WW (NB) 792609-001
11AC 7265NV M.2 D0 MOW 793840-001
11ac 2x2 Intel 8260NGW Snowfield Peak 2 806721-001
11ac Intel 3165 M.2 MOW 806723-001
11 ABGN+BT4 x 2.2 LUFFY INDO 812132-001
Broadcom Luffy 943228 abgn 2x2 + BT 4 LE PCIe+USB NGFF 2230 MOW 797884-001
(24) WWAN module (select products only)
NOTE: For spare part information, see WWAN module (select products only)
on page 42.
Foxconn Amstel LTE/EVDO/HSPA+ w/GPS M.2 822828-001
T77W595 LTE M.2 w/GPS 800870-001
Computer major components 25
Item Component Spare part number
Huawei Wrangler MU736 HSPA+ w/GPS M.2 793516-001
(25) Battery 801554-001
(26) Optical drive
NOTE: For spare part information, see Mass storage devices on page 29.
(27) Service door
For 14" products 845169-001
For 15" products 845171-001
26 Chapter 3 Illustrated parts catalog
Display assembly subcomponents
Item Component Spare part number
(1) Bezel
For 14" HP 640 products 840658-001
For 15" HP 650 products 840726-001
For 14" HP 645 products 841482-001
For 15" HP 655 products 842333-001
(2) Hinge cover
Hinge cover for 14" products 840685-001
Hinge cover for 15" products 840738-001
Display assembly subcomponents 27
Item Component Spare part number
(3) Hinge cover
Hinge cover for 14" products with a touch screen 840686-001
Hinge cover for 15" products with a touch screen 845835-001
(4) Panel
Slim panel for 14" products 840697-001
Flat panel for 14" products 840698-001
Touch screen for 14" products (includes camera) 840687-001
Slim panel for 15" products 840748-001
Flat panel for 15" products 840749-001
Touch screen for 15" products (includes camera) 840740-001
(5) Hinge Kit
NOTE: For spare part information, see Mass storage devices on page 29.
(6) WLAN cable, included in Cable Kit
Cable Kit for 14" products 840659-001
Cable Kit for 15" products 840727-001
(7) WWAN cable, included in Cable Kit 840727-001
Cable Kit for 14" products 840659-001
Cable Kit for 15" products 840727-001
(8) Display cable
For 14" products 840660-001
For 14" products with a touch screen 845829-001
For 15" products 840728-001
For 15" products with a touch screen 845834-001
(9) Back cover
For 14" products 840656-001
For 14" products with a touch screen 845828-001
For 15" products 840724-001
For 15" products with a touch screen 845833-001
28 Chapter 3 Illustrated parts catalog
Mass storage devices
Item Component Spare part number
(1) Solid-state drive
128GB M2 SATA-3 TLC 840701-001
841485-001
842336-001
128GB SATA-3 TLC for use in Brazil 840708-001
180GB M2 SATA-3 MLC 840702-001
841486-001
842337-001
180GB M2 SATA-3 self-encrypting Opal2 841487-001
842338-001
180GB M2 SATA-3 self-encrypting OPAL2 MLC 840703-001
SSD 240GB 2280 M2 SATA-3 843145-001
256GB M2 SATA-3 TLC 840704-001
841489-001
842340-001
256GB SATA-3 TLC for use in Brazil 840709-001
Mass storage devices 29
Item Component Spare part number
256GB M2 SATA-3 self-encrypting OPAL2 MLC 840705-001
842341-001
841490-001
256GB M2 PCIe-3x4 NVMe 840710-001
256GB PCIe-3x4 NVMe 841488-001
842339-001
512GB M2 SATA-3 TLC 840706-001
841492-001
842343-001
512GB M2 SATA-3 self-encrypting OPAL2 MLC 840707-001
841493-001
842344-001
512GB M2 PCIe-3x4 NVMe 840711-001
841491-001
842342-001
(2) Hard Drive Hardware Kit 840682-001
(3) Hard drive
500GB 7200RPM RAW 7mm 703267-001
500GB 5400RPM SATA RAW HYB8G 7mm 732000-001
1TB 5400RPM RAW 7mm 762990-001
500GB 7200RPM SATA FIPS RAW 7mm 820572-001
500GB 7200RPM SATA self-encrypting RAW 7mm 820573-001
(4) Optical drive (select products only)
Optical drive/Blu-ray combo for 14" products 840688-001
Optical drive/DVD ROM combo for 14" products 840689-001
840690-001
Optical drive/Blu-ray combo for 15" products 840741-001
Optical drive/DVD combo for 15" products 840742-001
Optical drive/DVD ROM combo for 15" products 840743-001
For products with an optical drive 840745-001
For products with an optical drive and a serial port (select products only) 840746-001
30 Chapter 3 Illustrated parts catalog
Miscellaneous parts
Component Spare part number
AC adapter
90 W PFC ADPTR S-3P 4.5MM (select 15" products only) 710413-001
65 W AC adapter nPFC S-3P 4.5MM 710412-001
65 W AC adapter nPFC SMART 4.5mm EM 714657-001
45 W AC adapter NPFC SMART RC 4.5mm NSLIM 741727-001
45 W AC adapter NPFC SMART RC 4.5mm 2P 742436-001
Antenna Kit
For 14" products 840655-001
For 15" products 840723-001
Bracket Kit (includes fingerprint reader bracket, WLAN module bracket, and smart card reader bracket
for 14" products)
840683-001
Cable Kit
For 14" products 840659-001
For 15" products 840728-001
Plastics Kit
For 14" products 840696-001
For 15" products 840747-001
Rubber Kit 828884-001
Screw Kit
For 14" products 840699-001
For 15" products 840750-001
Speaker Kit 840700-001
Miscellaneous parts 31
4 Removal and replacement procedures
preliminary requirements
Tools required
You will need the following tools to complete the removal and replacement procedures:
● Flat-bladed screwdriver
● Magnetic screwdriver
● Phillips P0 and P1 screwdrivers
Service considerations
The following sections include some of the considerations that you must keep in mind during disassembly
and assembly procedures.
NOTE: As you remove each subassembly from the computer, place the subassembly (and all accompanying
screws) away from the work area to prevent damage.
Plastic parts
CAUTION: Using excessive force during disassembly and reassembly can damage plastic parts. Use care
when handling the plastic
32 Chapter 4 Removal and replacement procedures preliminary requirements
Cables and connectors
CAUTION: When servicing the computer, be sure that cables are placed in their proper locations during the
reassembly process. Improper cable placement can damage the computer.
Cables must be handled with extreme care to avoid damage. Apply only the tension required to unseat or seat
the cables during removal and insertion. Handle cables by the connector whenever possible. In all cases, avoid
bending, twisting, or tearing cables. Be sure that cables are routed in such a way that they cannot be caught
or snagged by parts being removed or replaced. Handle flex cables with extreme care; these cables tear
easily.
Drive handling
CAUTION: Drives are fragile components that must be handled with care. To prevent damage to the
computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions:
Before removing or inserting a hard drive, shut down the computer. If you are unsure whether the computer is
off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system.
Before handling a drive, be sure that you are discharged of static electricity. While handling a drive, avoid
touching the connector.
Before removing a diskette drive or optical drive, be sure that a diskette or disc is not in the drive and be sure
that the optical drive tray is closed.
Handle drives on surfaces covered with at least one inch of shock-proof foam.
Avoid dropping drives from any height onto any surface.
Avoid exposing an internal hard drive to products that have magnetic fields, such as monitors or speakers.
Avoid exposing an internal hard drive to products that have magnetic fields, such as monitors or speakers.
Avoid exposing a drive to temperature extremes or liquids.
If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble pack mailer or other suitable form of protective
packaging and label the package “FRAGILE."
Service considerations 33
Grounding guidelines
Electrostatic discharge damage
Electronic components are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Circuitry design and structure determine
the degree of sensitivity. Networks built into many integrated circuits provide some protection, but in many
cases, ESD contains enough power to alter device parameters or melt silicon junctions.
A discharge of static electricity from a finger or other conductor can destroy static-sensitive devices or
microcircuitry. Even if the spark is neither felt nor heard, damage may have occurred.
An electronic device exposed to ESD may not be affected at all and can work perfectly throughout a normal
cycle. Or the device may function normally for a while, then degrade in the internal layers, reducing its life
expectancy.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the computer when you are removing or installing internal components,
observe these precautions:
Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them.
Before touching an electronic component, discharge static electricity by using the guidelines described in this
section.
Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible.
If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container.
The following table shows how humidity affects the electrostatic voltage levels generated by different
activities.
CAUTION: A product can be degraded by as little as 700 V.
Typical electrostatic voltage levels
Relative humidity
Event 10% 40% 55%
Walking across carpet 35,000 V 15,000 V 7,500 V
Walking across vinyl floor 12,000 V 5,000 V 3,000 V
Motions of bench worker 6,000 V 800 V 400 V
Removing DIPS from plastic tube 2,000 V 700 V 400 V
Removing DIPS from vinyl tray 11,500 V 4,000 V 2,000 V
Removing DIPS from Styrofoam 14,500 V 5,000 V 3,500 V
Removing bubble pack from PCB 26,500 V 20,000 V 7,000 V
Packing PCBs in foam-lined box 21,000 V 11,000 V 5,000 V
34 Chapter 4 Removal and replacement procedures preliminary requirements
Packaging and transporting guidelines
Follow these grounding guidelines when packaging and transporting equipment:
● To avoid hand contact, transport products in static-safe tubes, bags, or boxes.
● Protect ESD-sensitive parts and assemblies with conductive or approved containers or packaging.
● Keep ESD-sensitive parts in their containers until the parts arrive at static-free workstations.
● Place items on a grounded surface before removing items from their containers.
● Always be properly grounded when touching a component or assembly.
● Store reusable ESD-sensitive parts from assemblies in protective packaging or nonconductive foam.
● Use transporters and conveyors made of antistatic belts and roller bushings. Be sure that mechanized
equipment used for moving materials is wired to ground and that proper materials are selected to avoid
static charging. When grounding is not possible, use an ionizer to dissipate electric charges.
Workstation guidelines
Follow these grounding workstation guidelines:
● Cover the workstation with approved static-shielding material.
● Use a wrist strap connected to a properly grounded work surface and use properly grounded tools and
equipment.
● Use conductive field service tools, such as cutters, screwdrivers, and vacuums.
● When fixtures must directly contact dissipative surfaces, use fixtures made only of static safe materials.
● Keep the work area free of nonconductive materials, such as ordinary plastic assembly aids and
Styrofoam.
● Handle ESD-sensitive components, parts, and assemblies by the case or PCM laminate. Handle these
items only at static-free workstations.
● Avoid contact with pins, leads, or circuitry.
● Turn off power and input signals before inserting or removing connectors or test equipment.
Grounding guidelines 35
Equipment guidelines
Grounding equipment must include either a wrist strap or a foot strap at a grounded workstation.
● When seated, wear a wrist strap connected to a grounded system. Wrist straps are flexible straps with a
minimum of one megohm 10% resistance in the ground cords. To provide proper ground, wear a strap
snugly against the skin at all times. On grounded mats with banana-plug connectors, use alligator clips
to connect a wrist strap.
● When standing, use foot straps and a grounded floor mat. Foot straps (heel, toe, or boot straps) can be
used at standing workstations and are compatible with most types of shoes or boots. On conductive
floors or dissipative floor mats, use foot straps on both feet with a minimum of one megohm resistance
between the operator and ground. To be effective, the conductive must be worn in contact with the skin.
The following grounding equipment is recommended to prevent electrostatic damage:
● Antistatic tape
● Antistatic smocks, aprons, and sleeve protectors
● Conductive bins and other assembly or soldering aids
● Nonconductive foam
● Conductive tabletop workstations with ground cords of one megohm resistance
● Static-dissipative tables or floor mats with hard ties to the ground
● Field service kits
● Static awareness labels
● Material-handling packages
● Nonconductive plastic bags, tubes, or boxes
● Metal tote boxes
● Electrostatic voltage levels and protective materials
The following table lists the shielding protection provided by antistatic bags and floor mats.
Material Use Voltage protection level
Antistatic plastics Bags 1,500 V
Carbon-loaded plastic Floor mats 7,500 V
Metallized laminate Floor mats 5,000 V
36 Chapter 4 Removal and replacement procedures preliminary requirements
5 Removal and replacement procedures for
Customer Self-Repair parts
This chapter provides removal and replacement procedures for Customer Self-Repair parts.
NOTE: The Customer Self-Repair program is not available in all locations. Installing a part not supported by
the Customer Self-Repair program may void your warranty. Check your warranty to determine if Customer
Self-Repair is supported in your location.
Component replacement procedures
NOTE: Details about your computer, including model, serial number, product key, and length of warranty,
are on the service tag at the bottom of your computer. See Locating system information on page 19 for
details.
NOTE: HP continually improves and changes product parts. For complete and current information on
supported parts for your computer, go to http://partsurfer.hp.com, select your country or region, and then
follow the on-screen instructions.
There are as many as xx screws that must be removed, replaced, and/or loosened when servicing Customer
Self-Repair parts. Make special note of each screw size and location during removal and replacement.
Service door
Description Spare part number
Service door
For 14" products 845169-001
For 15" products 845171-001
1. Turn off the computer. If you are unsure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the
computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system.
2. Disconnect the power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the computer.
3. Disconnect all external devices from the computer.
Remove the service door:
1. Depending on the product, remove 8 (for 14 products) or 10 (for 15 products) M2.5x6L P1 screws (1).
Component replacement procedures 37
2. Lift the service door to remove it (2).
Battery
Description Spare part number
Battery 3C 48WHr 4.21Ah LI CI03048XL-PR 801554-001
IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal
andreplacement
Before removing the battery, follow these steps:
1. Shut down the computer.
2. Disconnect all external devices connected to thecomputer.
3. Disconnect the power from the computer by first unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet and then
unplugging the AC adapter from the computer.
4. Remove the service door (see Service door on page 37).
Remove the battery:
1. Loosen 6 P1 captive screws (1).
38 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement procedures for Customer Self-Repair parts
2. Lift the battery (2), and remove it (3).
Reverse this procedure to install the battery.
Hard drive
Description Spare part number
Hard drive
500GB 7200RPM RAW 7mm 703267-001
500GB 5400RPM SATA RAW HYB8G 7mm 732000-001
1TB 5400RPM RAW 7mm 762990-001
500GB 7200RPM SATA FIPS RAW 7mm 820572-001
500GB 7200RPM SATA self-encrypting RAW 7mm 820573-001
HDD Hardware Kit 840682-001
IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and
replacement
Before removing the hard drive, follow these steps:
1. Shut down the computer.
2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer.
3. Disconnect the power from the computer by first unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet and then
unplugging the AC adapter from the computer.
4. Remove the following components:
a. Service door (see Service door on page 37).
b. Battery (see Battery on page 38).
Component replacement procedures 39
Remove the hard drive:
1. Loosen 4 P1 captive screws or remove 4 M 2.0x8L P1 screws (1).
2. Pull the plastic tab (2), and then remove the hard drive (3).
3. If it is necessary to disassemble the hard drive, remove the 4 screws (1), and then remove pull the tab
(2) to remove the cover from the hard drive.
40 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement procedures for Customer Self-Repair parts
Reverse this procedure to reassemble and install the hard drive.
Solid-state drive (select products only)
Description Spare part number
Solid-state drive
128GB M2 SATA-3 TLC 840701-001
841485-001
842336-001
128GB SATA-3 TLC for use in Brazil 840708-001
180GB M2 SATA-3 MLC 840702-001
841486-001
842337-001
180GB M2 SATA-3 self-encrypting Opal2 841487-001
842338-001
180GB M2 SATA-3 self-encrypting OPAL2 MLC 840703-001
SSD 240GB 2280 M2 SATA-3 843145-001
256GB M2 SATA-3 TLC 840704-001
841489-001
842340-001
256GB SATA-3 TLC for use in Brazil 840709-001
256GB M2 SATA-3 self-encrypting OPAL2 MLC 840705-001
842341-001
841490-001
256GB M2 PCIe-3x4 NVMe 840710-001
256GB PCIe-3x4 NVMe 841488-001
842339-001
512GB M2 SATA-3 TLC 840706-001
841492-001
842343-001
512GB M2 SATA-3 self-encrypting OPAL2 MLC 840707-001
841493-001
842344-001
512GB M2 PCIe-3x4 NVMe 840711-001
841491-001
842342-001
Component replacement procedures 41
IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and
replacement
Before removing the solid-state drive, follow these steps:
1. Shut down the computer.
2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer.
3. Disconnect the power from the computer by first unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet and then
unplugging the AC adapter from the computer.
4. Remove the following components:
a. Service door (see Service door on page 37).
b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38)
c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39).
Remove the solid-state drive:
▲ Remove 1 Phillips M2.0x8 screw (1), and then remove the solid-state drive (2).
Reverse this procedure to install the solid-state drive.
WWAN module (select products only)
NOTE: The WWAN module spare part kit includes the cable.
Description Spare part number
WWAN module
Foxconn Amstel LTE/EVDO/HSPA+ w/GPS M.2 822828-001
42 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement procedures for Customer Self-Repair parts
Description Spare part number
T77W595 LTE M.2 w/GPS 800870-001
Huawei Wrangler MU736 HSPA+ w/GPS M.2 793516-001
IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and
replacement
Before removing the WWAN module, follow these steps:
1. Shut down the computer.
2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer.
3. Disconnect the power from the computer by first unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet and then
unplugging the AC adapter from the computer.
4. Remove the following components:
a. Service door (see Service door on page 37).
b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38)
c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39).
d. Solid state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41).
Remove the WWAN module:
1. Disconnect the two cables (1).
Component replacement procedures 43
2. Remove 1 M 2.0x 3L P1screw (2), and then remove the WWAN module.
Reverse this procedure to install the WWAN module.
WLAN module
NOTE: The WLAN module spare part kit includes the cable.
Description Spare part number
WLAN
Broadcom Nami 43142 bgn 1x1 + BT 4 LE PCIe+USB NGFF 1630 MOW 792608-001
Realtek Shanks RTL8188EE bgn 1x1 PCI-e NGFF 2230 M.2 WW (NB) 792609-001
11AC 7265NV M.2 D0 MOW 793840-001
11ac 2x2 Intel 8260NGW Snowfield Peak 2 806721-001
11ac Intel 3165 M.2 MOW 806723-001
11 ABGN+BT4 x 2.2 LUFFY INDO 812132-001
Broadcom Luffy 943228 abgn 2x2 + BT 4 LE PCIe+USB NGFF 2230 MOW 797884-001
IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and
replacement
Before removing the WLAN, follow these steps:
44 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement procedures for Customer Self-Repair parts
1. Shut down the computer.
2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer.
3. Disconnect the power from the computer by first unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet and then
unplugging the AC adapter from the computer.
4. Remove the following components:
a. Service door (see Service door on page 37).
b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38)
c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39).
d. Solid state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41).
e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42).
Remove the WLAN module:
1. Disconnect the two cables (1).
2. Remove 1 M 2.0x3L P1 screw (2).
3. Remove the bracket (3), and then remove the WLAN module.
Reverse this procedure to install the WLAN module.
Component replacement procedures 45
Optical drive
Description Spare part number
Optical drive
Optical drive/Blu-ray combo for 14” products 840688-001
Optical drive/DVD combo for 14" products 840689-001
Optical drive/DVD ROM combo for 14" products 840690-001
Optical drive/Blu-ray combo for 15" products 840741-001
Optical drive/DVD combo for 15" products 840742-001
Optical drive/DVD ROM combo for 15" products 840743-001
IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and
replacement
Before removing the optical drive, follow these steps:
1. Shut down the computer.
2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer.
3. Disconnect the power from the computer by first unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet and then
unplugging the AC adapter from the computer.
4. Remove the following components:
a. Service door (see Service door on page 37).
b. Battery (see Battery on page 38).
c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39).
d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41).
e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42).
f. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44).
Remove the optical drive:
1. Remove 1 Phillips M2.0x8 screw (1).
46 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement procedures for Customer Self-Repair parts
2. Remove the optical drive (2).
Reverse this procedure to install the optical drive.
Component replacement procedures 47
Keyboard
In this section, the first table provides the main spare part number for the keyboard. The second table
provides the country codes.
Description Spare part number
Keyboard for 14" products (includes keyboard cable) 840791-001
Backlit keyboard for 14" products (includes keyboard cable and backlight cable) 840800-001
840801-001
Keyboard for 15" products (includes keyboard cable) 841136-001
Backlit keyboard for 15" products ( includes keyboard cable and backlight cable) 841137-001
841145-001
For use in country or
region
Spare part
number
For use in country or
region
Spare part
number
For use in country or
region
Spare part
number
Belgium -A41 India -D61 Saudi Arabia -171
Brazil -201 Israel -BB1 Slovenia -BA1
Bulgaria -261 Italy -061 South Korea -AD1
Canada -DB1 Japan -291 Spain -071
Czech Republic and
Slovakia
-FL1 Latin America -161 Sweden and Finland -B71
Denmark -081 The Netherlands -B31 Switzerland -BG1
Denmark, Finland, and
Norway
-DH1 Northern Africa -FP1 Taiwan -AB1
France -051 Norway -091 Thailand -281
Germany -041 Portugal -131 Turkey -141
Greece -151 Romania -271 United Kingdom -031
Hungary -211 Russia -251 United States -001
Iceland -DD1
Before removing the keyboard, follow these steps:
1. Turn off the computer. If you are unsure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the
computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system.
2. Disconnect the power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the computer.
3. Disconnect all external devices from the computer.
4. Remove the following components:
a. Service door (see Service door on page 37).
b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38)
48 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement procedures for Customer Self-Repair parts
c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39).
d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41).
e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42).
f. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44).
g. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46).
Remove the keyboard:
1. Remove the 3 M 2x4L screws that secure the keyboard to the computer.
2. Position the computer open and on its side.
Component replacement procedures 49
3. Gently insert a Torx screwdriver or other blunt tool into the keyboard release opening under the memory
module, and then press gently on the back of the keyboard until the keyboard disengages from the
computer.
CAUTION: Press gently to avoid damaging the mylar on the back of the keyboard.
4. Rotate the keyboard downward (1) onto the top cover (1), and then release and disconnect the following
connectors and cables:
● Release the keyboard connector (2) and then remove the cable (3).
● For products with a backlit keyboard, release the backlight connectors (4) and (6), and then
remove the cables (5) and (7).
50 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement procedures for Customer Self-Repair parts
5. Remove the keyboard (8).
Reverse this procedure to install the keyboard.
Memory
Description Spare part number
Memory
2GB PC3L 12800 1600MHz shared memory 691739-001
4GB PC3L 12800 1600MHz shared memory 691740-001
8GB PC3L 12800 1600MHz shared memory 693374-001
4GB 2133MHz 1.2v DDR4 shared memory 820569-001
8GB 2133MHz 1.2v DDR4 shared memory 820570-001
IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and
replacement
Component replacement procedures 51
Before removing the memory module, follow these steps:
1. Shut down the computer.
2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer.
3. Disconnect the power from the computer by first unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet and then
unplugging the AC adapter from the computer.
4. Remove the following components:
a. Service door (see Service door on page 37).
b. Battery (see Battery on page 38).
c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39).
d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41).
e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42).
f. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44).
g. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46).
h. Keyboard (see Keyboard on page 48).
▲ If you are replacing a memory module, remove the existing memory module:.
▲ Pull away the retention clips (1) on each side of the memory module.
The memory module tilts up.
▲ Grasp the edge of the memory module (2), and then gently pull the memory module out of the
memory module slot.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do
not touch the components on the memory module.
To protect a memory module after removal, place it in an electrostatic-safe container.
To install a memory module:
52 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement procedures for Customer Self-Repair parts
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do not
touch the components on the memory module.
1. Align the notched edge (1) of the memory module with the tab in the memory module slot.
2. With the memory module at a 45-degree angle from the surface of the memory module compartment,
press the module (2) into the memory module slot until it is seated.
3. Gently press the memory module down, applying pressure to both the left and right edges of the
memory module, until the retention clips snap into place.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, be sure that you do not bend the memory
module.
Component replacement procedures 53
6 Removal and replacement procedures for
Authorized Service Provider parts
This chapter provides removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider only parts.
CAUTION: Components described in this chapter should only be accessed by an authorized service provider.
Accessing these parts can damage the computer or void the warranty.
CAUTION: This computer does not have user-replaceable parts. Only HP authorized service providers should
perform the removal and replacement procedures described here. Accessing the internal part could damage
the computer or void the warranty.
Component replacement procedures
NOTE: Details about your computer, including model, serial number, product key, and length of warranty,
are on the service tag at the bottom of your computer. See Locating system information on page 19 for
details.
NOTE: HP continually improves and changes product parts. For complete and current information on
supported parts for your computer, go to http://partsurfer.hp.com, select your country or region, and then
follow the on-screen instructions.
There are as many as xx screws that must be removed, replaced, and/or loosened when servicing Authorized
Service Provider only parts. Make special note of each screw size and location during removal and
replacement.
54 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
Hinge cover
Description Spare part number
Hinge Kit for 14" products 840684-001
Hinge Kit for 15" products 840737-001
Hinge Kit for 14" products with a touch screen 845830-001
Hinge Kit for 15" products with a touch screen 845835-001
Hinge cover for 14" products 840685-001
Hinge cover for 15" products 840738-001
Hinge cover for 14" products with a touch screen 840686-001
Hinge cover for 15" products with a touch screen 845835-001
IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and
replacement
Before removing the hinge covers, follow these steps:
1. Turn off the computer. If you are unsure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the
computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system.
2. Disconnect the power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the computer.
3. Disconnect all external devices from the computer.
4. Remove the following components:
a. Service door (see Service door on page 37).
b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38)
c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39).
d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41).
e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42).
f. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44).
g. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46).
h. Keyboard (see Keyboard on page 48).
i. Memory (see Memory on page 51).
Remove the hinge covers:
▲ Remove the 2 M2x5L P1 screws (1), and then remove the hinge covers (2).
Component replacement procedures 55
Reverse this procedure to replace the hinge covers.
56 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
Base enclosure
IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and
replacement.
Description Spare part number
Base enclosure
For 14" products 840712-001
For 15" products 840725-001
Before removing the base enclosure, follow these steps:
1. Shut down the computer.
2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer.
3. Disconnect the power from the computer by first unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet and then
unplugging the AC adapter from the computer.
4. Remove the following components:
a. Service door (see Service door on page 37).
b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38)
c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39).
d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41).
e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42).
f. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44).
g. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46).
h. Keyboard (see Keyboard on page 48).
i. Memory (see Memory on page 51).
j. Hinge covers (see Hinge cover on page 55).
Remove the base enclosure:
1. Disconnect the fingerprint reader cable (1), the speaker cable (2), the display cable (3), and the pointing
stick cable (4).
Component replacement procedures 57
2. Remove the two M2x3L screws (1), the wo M2x1.5L 1 P0 screws (2), 1 M2.5x8L T8 screw (3), and 10
M2.6x6L T8 screws (8).
Reverse this procedure to install the base enclosure.
58 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
System board
Description Spare part number
System board
Discrete memory, Intel i5-6300U processor, and WWAN capability 840712-001
Discrete memory, Intel i5-6300U processor, WWAN capability, and Windows 840712-601
Discrete memory, Intel i7-6300U processor, and WWAN capability 840713-001
Discrete memory, Intel i7-6300U processor, WWAN capability, and Windows 840713-601
UMA memory, AMD A10-8700B processor, and WWAN capability 841494-001
842345-001
UMA memory, AMD A6-8500B processor 841495-001
842346-001
UMA memory, AMD A6-8500B processor, and Windows 841495-601
842346-601
UMA memory, AMD A8-8600B processor, and Windows 841497-001
842348-001
UMA memory, AMD A8-8600B processor, and Windows 841497-601
842348-601
UMA memory, AMD A8-8600B processor, and WWAN capability 841496-001
842347-001
UMA memory, AMD A8-8600B processor, and WWAN capability 841496-001
842347-001
UMA memory, Intel i3-6100U processor 840714-001
UMA memory, Intel i3-6100U processor and Windows 840714-601
UMA memory, Intel i5-6200U processor 840715-001
UMA memory, Intel i5-6200U processor and Windows 840715-601
UMA memory, Intel i5-6200U processor, and WWAN capability 840716-001
UMA memory, Intel i5-6200U processor, WWAN capability, and Windows 840716-601
UMA memory, Intel i5-6300U processor, and WWAN capability 840717-001
UMA memory, Intel i5-6300U processor, and WWAN capability, and Windows 840717-601
UMA memory, Intel i5-6440HQ processor, and WWAN capability 844345-001
UMA memory, Intel i5-6440HQ processor, and WWAN capability, and Windows 844345-601
UMA memory, Intel i7-6600U processor, and WWAN capability 840718-001
UMA memory, Intel i7-6600U processor, and WWAN capability, and Windows 840718-601
UMA memory, Intel i7-6820HQ processor, and WWAN capability 844346-001
UMA memory, Intel i7-6820HQ processor, and WWAN capability, and Windows 844346-601
Component replacement procedures 59
IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and
replacement
Before removing the system board, follow these steps:
1. Shut down the computer.
2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer.
3. Disconnect the power from the computer by first unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet and then
unplugging the AC adapter from the computer.
4. Remove the following components:
a. Service door (see Service door on page 37).
b. Battery (see Battery on page 38).
c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39).
d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41).
e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42).
f. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44).
g. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46).
h. Keyboard (see Keyboard on page 48).
i. Hinge covers (see Hinge cover on page 55).
j. Base enclosure (see Base enclosure on page 57).
Remove the system board:
1. Disconnect the RTC battery cable (2) and the power button board cable (2).
2. Loosen 3 P1 captive screws (1) on the fan, remove 4 M2x3L P1 screws (2) from the system board, and
remove 2 M2x3L screws from the ODD board (3).
60 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
3. Lift the system board (4), and then remove it (5).
Reverse this procedure to install the system board.
Fan and heat sink assembly
Description Spare part number
Fan and heat sink assembly
For 14" products with integrated graphics 840662-001
For 14" products with discrete graphics 840663-001
For 15" products with integrated graphics 840732-001
For 15" products with high-quality integrated graphics 840734-001
For 15" products with discrete graphics 840733-001
IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and
replacement
Before removing the fan and heat sink, follow these steps:
1. Shut down the computer.
2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer.
3. Disconnect the power from the computer by first unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet and then
unplugging the AC adapter from the computer.
4. Remove the following components:
Component replacement procedures 61
a. Service door (see Service door on page 37).
b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38)
c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39).
d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41).
e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42).
f. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44).
g. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46).
h. Keyboard (see Keyboard on page 48).
i. Hinge covers (see Hinge cover on page 55).
j. Base enclosure (see Base enclosure on page 57).
k. System board (see System board on page 59).
To remove the fan and heat sink assembly for products with discrete graphics:
1. Disconnect the cable (1) from the system board.
2. Loosen 6 Phillips captive screws (2).
3. Lift the fan and heat sink assembly (3) to remove it .
To remove the fan and heat sink assembly for products with integrated graphics:
1. Disconnect the cable (1) from the system board.
2. Loosen 4 Phillips captive screws (2).
62 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
3. Lift the fan and heat sink assembly (3) to remove it.
Reverse this procedure to install the fan and heat sink assembly.
Component replacement procedures 63
Optical drive board
Description Spare part number
Optical drive board
For products with an optical drive 840745-001
For products with an optical drive and a serial port (select products only) 840746-001
IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and
replacement
Before removing the optical drive board, follow these steps:
1. Shut down the computer.
2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer.
3. Disconnect the power from the computer by first unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet and then
unplugging the AC adapter from the computer.
4. Remove the following components:
a. Service door (see Service door on page 37).
b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38)
c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39).
d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41).
e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42).
f. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44).
g. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46).
h. Keyboard (see Keyboard on page 48).
i. Hinge covers (see Hinge cover on page 55).
j. Base enclosure (see Base enclosure on page 57).
k. System board (see System board on page 59).
l. Fan/heat sink assembly (see Fan and heat sink assembly on page 61).
Remove the optical drive board:
▲ Disconnect the optical drive board cable (1), and then remove the optical drive board (2).
64 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
Reverse this procedure to install the optical drive board.
Top cover and TouchPad
NOTE: The top cover spare part kit includes the TouchPad.
Description Spare part number
Top cover (includes TouchPad)
Top cover for 14" products with a TouchPad 840719-001
Top cover for 14" products with a TouchPad 840720-001
Top cover for 14" products with a TouchPad, TouchPad on/off button, and bracket 840721-001
Top cover for 14" products with a TouchPad, TouchPad on/off button, and bracket 845170-001
Top cover for 15" products with a TouchPad 840751-001
Top cover for 15" products with a TouchPad and pointing stick 840752-001
Top cover for 15" products with a TouchPad, TouchPad on/off button, and bracket 840753-001
Top cover for 15" products with a TouchPad, TouchPad on/off button, pointing stick, and bracket 845172-001
IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and
replacement
Before removing the top cover, follow these steps:
1. Shut down the computer.
2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer.
Component replacement procedures 65
3. Disconnect the power from the computer by first unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet and then
unplugging the AC adapter from the computer.
4. Remove the following components:
a. Service door (see Service door on page 37).
b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38)
c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39).
d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41).
e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42).
f. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44).
g. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46).
h. Keyboard (see Keyboard on page 48).
i. Hinge covers (see Hinge cover on page 55).
j. Base enclosure (see Base enclosure on page 57).
k. System board (see System board on page 59).
l. Fan/heat sink assembly (see Fan and heat sink assembly on page 61).
Remove the top cover:
1. If the computer is equipped with a pointing stick (select products only), remove 2 M2x1.5L P0 pointing
stick screws.
66 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
2. Turn the computer over, and then disconnect the power button board cable (1), the speaker cable (2),
and the fingerprint reader board cable (3).
3. Carefully disconnect the plastic clips (1) on the front edge, and then remove the top cover (1).
Reverse this procedure to install the top cover.
To remove the TouchPad:
1. Disconnect the TouchPad cables (1) and (2).
Component replacement procedures 67
2. Remove 4 Phillips screws (1), and then lift the TouchPad bracket (2) to remove it.
RTC battery
Description Spare part number
RTC battery 651948-001
68 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and
replacement
Before removing the RTC battery, follow these steps:
1. Shut down the computer.
2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer.
3. Remove the following components:
a. Service door (see Service door on page 37).
b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38)
c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39).
d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41).
e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42).
f. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44).
g. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46).
h. Keyboard (see Keyboard on page 48).
i. Hinge covers (see Hinge cover on page 55).
j. Base enclosure (see Base enclosure on page 57).
k. System board (see System board on page 59).
l. Fan/heat sink assembly (see Fan and heat sink assembly on page 61).
m. Top cover (see Top cover and TouchPad on page 65).
To remove the RTC battery:
▲ If not already disconnected, disconnect the cable, and then remove the RTC battery.
Component replacement procedures 69
Reverse this procedure to install the RTC battery.
Speaker
NOTE: The speaker spare part kit includes the speaker cable.
Description Spare part number
Speaker Kit 840700-001
IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and
replacement
Before removing the speaker, follow these steps:
1. Shut down the computer.
2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer.
3. Disconnect the power from the computer by first unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet and then
unplugging the AC adapter from the computer.
4. Remove the following components:
a. Service door (see Service door on page 37).
b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38)
c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39).
d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41).
e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42).
f. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44).
g. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46).
h. Keyboard (see Keyboard on page 48).
i. Hinge covers (see Hinge cover on page 55).
j. Base enclosure (see Base enclosure on page 57).
k. System board (see System board on page 59).
l. Fan/heat sink assembly (see Fan and heat sink assembly on page 61).
m. Top cover (see Top cover and TouchPad on page 65).
Remove the speaker:
1. Disconnect the speaker cable (1)...
2. Remove 2 Phillips screws (2).
70 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
3. Lift the speaker assembly to remove it.(3).
Reverse this procedure to install the speaker.
Power button board
NOTE: The power button board spare part kit includes the cable.
Description Spare part number
Power button board
For 14" products 840694-001
For 15" products 840744-001
IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and
replacement.
Before removing the power button board, follow these steps:
1. Shut down the computer.
2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer.
3. Remove the following components:
a. Service door (see Service door on page 37).
b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38)
c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39).
d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41).
e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42).
Component replacement procedures 71
f. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44).
g. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46).
h. Keyboard (see Keyboard on page 48).
i. Hinge covers (see Hinge cover on page 55).
j. Base enclosure (see Base enclosure on page 57).
k. System board (see System board on page 59).
l. Fan/heat sink assembly (see Fan and heat sink assembly on page 61).
m. Top cover (see Top cover and TouchPad on page 65).
Remove the power button board:
▲ Remove the 2 M2x3L, P1 screws (1), release the power button power button board cable (2), and them
remove the power button board (3):
Reverse this procedure to install the power button board.
Fingerprint reader (select products only)
NOTE: The fingerprint reader spare part kit includes the cable
Description Spare part number
Fingerprint reader
For 14" products 840664-001
For 15" products 840735-001
72 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and
replacement
Before removing the fingerprint reader, follow these steps:
1. Shut down the computer.
2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer.
3. Disconnect the power from the computer by first unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet and then
unplugging the AC adapter from the computer.
4. Remove the following components:
a. Service door (see Service door on page 37).
b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38)
c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39).
d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41).
e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42).
f. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44).
g. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46).
h. Keyboard (see Keyboard on page 48).
i. Hinge covers (see Hinge cover on page 55).
j. Base enclosure (see Base enclosure on page 57).
k. System board (see System board on page 59).
l. Fan/heat sink assembly (see Fan and heat sink assembly on page 61).
m. Top cover (see Top cover and TouchPad on page 65).
Remove the fingerprint reader:
1. Remove the Phillips screwfrom the fingerprint reader bracket(1).
2. Remove the bracket(2).
Component replacement procedures 73
3. Remove the cable (3), and then remove the fingerprint reader (4).
Reverse this procedure to install the fingerprint reader.
Smart card reader
NOTE: The smart card reader spare part kit includes the metal shield
Description Spare part number
Smart card reader board (includes metal shield) 840694-001
IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and
replacement
Before removing the smart card reader, follow these steps:
1. Shut down the computer.
2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer.
3. Disconnect the power from the computer by first unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet and then
unplugging the AC adapter from the computer.
4. Remove the following components:
a. Service door (see Service door on page 37).
b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38)
c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39).
d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41).
e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42).
74 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
f. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44).
g. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46).
h. Keyboard (see Keyboard on page 48).
i. Hinge covers (see Hinge cover on page 55).
j. Base enclosure (see Base enclosure on page 57).
k. System board (see System board on page 59).
l. Fan/heat sink assembly (see Fan and heat sink assembly on page 61).
m. Top cover (see Top cover and TouchPad on page 65).
Remove the smart card reader:
▲ Remove the metal shield, and then lift the smart card reader to remove it.
Reverse this procedure to install the smart card reader.
Component replacement procedures 75
Near Field Communication module
Description Spare part number
Near Field Communication (NFC) module 840661-001
For 14" products 840661-001
For 15" products 840729-001
Near Field Communication (NFC) cable
For 14" products 840661-001
For 15" products 840729-001
IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and
replacement
Before removing the NFC module, follow these steps:
1. Turn off the computer. If you are unsure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the
computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system.
2. Disconnect the power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the computer.
3. Disconnect all external devices from the computer.
4. Remove the following components:
a. Service door (see Service door on page 37).
b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38)
c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39).
d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41).
e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42).
f. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44).
g. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46).
h. Keyboard (see Keyboard on page 48).
i. Hinge covers (see Hinge cover on page 55).
j. Base enclosure (see Base enclosure on page 57).
k. System board (see System board on page 59).
l. Fan/heat sink assembly (see Fan and heat sink assembly on page 61).
m. Top cover (see Top cover and TouchPad on page 65).
Remove the NFC module:
▲ Disconnect the NFC module (1), and then remove it (2).
76 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
Reverse this procedure to replace the panel.
Component replacement procedures 77
Audio board
Description Spare part number
Audio board 840692-001
IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and
replacement
Before removing the audio board, follow these steps:
1. Turn off the computer. If you are unsure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the
computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system.
2. Disconnect the power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the computer.
3. Disconnect all external devices from the computer.
4. Remove the following components:
a. Service door (see Service door on page 37).
b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38)
c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39).
d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41).
e. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46).
f. Keyboard (see Keyboard on page 48).
g. Hinge covers (see Hinge cover on page 55).
h. Base enclosure (see Base enclosure on page 57).
i. System board (see System board on page 59).
j. Fan/heat sink assembly (see Fan and heat sink assembly on page 61).
k. Top cover (see Top cover and TouchPad on page 65).
Remove the audio board:
▲ Remove 2 M2x3L P1 screws (1), and then remove the audio board (2).
78 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
Reverse this procedure to replace the audio board.
Component replacement procedures 79
Serial
Description Spare part number
Serial 840746-001
IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and
replacement
Before removing the audio board, follow these steps:
1. Turn off the computer. If you are unsure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the
computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system.
2. Disconnect the power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the computer.
3. Disconnect all external devices from the computer.
4. Remove the following components:
a. Service door (see Service door on page 37).
b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38)
c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39).
d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41).
e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42).
f. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44).
g. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46).
h. Keyboard (see Keyboard on page 48).
i. Hinge covers (see Hinge cover on page 55).
j. Base enclosure (see Base enclosure on page 57).
k. System board (see System board on page 59).
l. Fan/heat sink assembly (see Fan and heat sink assembly on page 61).
m. Top cover (see Top cover and TouchPad on page 65).
Remove the serial port:
▲ Remove 2 M2x3L P1 screws(1), remove the cable from the routing channels (2), and then remove the
serial port(3).
80 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
Reverse this procedure to replace the audio boardr.
Component replacement procedures 81
Display assembly
All display assemblies include WLAN antenna transceivers and cables. WWAN models also include 2 WWAN
antenna transceivers and cables.
Full hinge-up displays are not spared.
This section describes removing components that do not require that you entirely remove the display
assembly from the computer. You can remove the display bezel, webcam/microphone module, and display
panel with the display assembly still attached to the computer.
To remove the remaining display components, including the display brackets, antennas, and enclosure, you
must remove the entire display assembly from the computer. See Display assembly subcomponents
on page 27 for more information about removing the remaining components.
Description Spare part number
Display panels ( [14.0-in], anti-glare, LED)
Slim panel for 14" products 840697-001
Flat panel for 14" products 840698-001
Touch screen for 14" products (includes camera) 840687-001
Slim panel for 15" products 840748-001
Flat panel for 15" products 840749-001
Touch screen for 15" products (includes camera) 840740-001
Display bezels
For 14" HP 640 products 840658-001
For 14" HP 645 products 841482-001
For 15" HP 650 products 840726-001
For 15" HP 655 products 842333-001
Before removing the display panel, follow these steps:
1. Shut down the computer. If you are unsure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the
computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system.
2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer.
3. Disconnect the power from the computer by first unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet, and
then unplugging the AC adapter from the computer.
4. Remove the service door (see Service door on page 37).
5. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38).
6. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38)
7. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39).
8. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41).
9. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42).
10. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44).
82 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
11. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46).
12. Keyboard (see Keyboard on page 48).
13. Hinge covers (see Hinge cover on page 55).
14. Base enclosure (see Base enclosure on page 57).
15. System board (see System board on page 59).
16. Fan/heat sink assembly (see Fan and heat sink assembly on page 61).
17. Top cover (see Top cover and TouchPad on page 65).
Remove the display assembly components:
1. Position the computer upright, with the front toward you.
2. Open the computer as far as possible.
3. If it is necessary to replace the display bezel:
a. Close the computer, position it so you can access the bottom of the display, and then open the
computer slightly.
b. Flex the inside edges of the top edge (1), the left and right sides (2), and the bottom edge (3) of
the display bezel until the bezel disengages from the display enclosure. The display bezel is
available using spare part number 840658-001.
4. If it is necessary to replace the display panel:
a. Remove the four M2x3L P1 screws that secure the display panel to the display enclosure.
● 781959-001—35.6-cm (14.0-in), LED, AntiGlare display panel, UWVA
● 784476-001—35.6-cm (14.0-in), LED, AntiGlare display panel, SVA HD+
Display assembly 83
b. Rotate the top of the display panel downward (1) onto the keyboard.
c. Disconnect the cable from the connector (2), and then remove the panel (3).
84 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
5. If it is necessary to replace the hinge brackets, remove the M2.5x2.5L P1 screws from each side (1), and
then remove the hinge brackets (2).
6. If it is necessary to replace the WLAN antenna cables, remove the 3 screws from each side (1), and then
remove the WLAN antenna cables (2).
Display assembly 85
7. If it is necessary to replace the WWAN antenna cables (select products only, remove the 3 screws from
each side (1), and then remove the WWAN antenna cables (2).
8. If it is necessary to replace the webcam:
a. Disconnect the cable (1) from the webcam.
b. Detach the webcam (2) from the display enclosure.
The webcam module is available using spare part number 840722-001.
9. If it is necessary to replace the microphone board:
a. Disconnect the cable (1) from the microphone board.
86 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
b. Detach the microphone board (2) from the display enclosure.
The microphone board is available using spare part number 840691-001.
Reverse these procedures to reassemble and install the display assembly components.
Display assembly 87
7 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure
Start in Windows 10
Using Computer Setup
Computer Setup, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and
output devices on the system (such as disk drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Computer Setup
includes settings for the types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and the amount of
system and extended memory.
NOTE: Use extreme care when making changes in Computer Setup. Errors can prevent the computer from
operating properly.
Starting Computer Setup
NOTE: An external keyboard or mouse connected to a USB port can be used with Computer Setup only if USB
legacy support is enabled.
To start Computer Setup, follow these steps:
▲ Start Computer Setup.
● Computers or tablets with keyboards:
▲ Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer
Setup.
● Tablets without keyboards:
▲ Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until
the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap F10 to enter Computer Setup.
Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup
● To select a menu or a menu item, use the tab key and the keyboard arrow keys and then press enter, or
use a pointing device to select the item.
NOTE: On tablets without keyboards, you can use your finger to make selections.
● To scroll up and down, select the up arrow or the down arrow in the upper-right corner of the screen, or
use the up arrow key or the down arrow key on the keyboard.
● To close open dialog boxes and return to the main Computer Setup screen, press esc, and then follow
the on-screen instructions.
88 Chapter 7 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start in Windows 10
To exit Computer Setup menus, choose one of the following methods:
● To exit Computer Setup menus without saving your changes:
Select the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
– or –
Select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter.
● To save your changes and exit Computer Setup menus:
Select the Save icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
– or –
Select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter.
Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts.
Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup
NOTE: Restoring defaults will not change the hard drive mode.
To return all settings in Computer Setup to the values that were set at the factory, follow these steps:
1. Start Computer Setup. See Starting Computer Setup on page 88.
2. Select Main, and then select Apply Factory Defaults and Exit.
NOTE: On select products, the selections may display Restore Defaults instead of Apply Factory
Defaults and Exit.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
4. To save your changes and exit, select the Save icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then
follow the on-screen instructions.
– or –
Select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter.
Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts.
NOTE: Your password settings and security settings are not changed when you restore the factory settings.
Using Computer Setup 89
Updating the BIOS
Updated versions of the BIOS may be available on the HP website.
Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs.
Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing
and troubleshooting the file.
Determining the BIOS version
To decide whether you need to update Computer Setup (BIOS), first determine the BIOS version on your
computer.
BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) can be accessed by pressing fn+esc (if
you are already in Windows) or by using Computer Setup.
1. Start Computer Setup. See Starting Computer Setup on page 88.
2. Select Main, and then select System Information.
3. To exit Computer Setup without saving your changes, select the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the
screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
– or –
Select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter.
To check for later BIOS versions, see Downloading a BIOS update on page 90.
Downloading a BIOS update
CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and
install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do
not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional
docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these
instructions:
Do not disconnect power on the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet.
Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep.
Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord.
1. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app.
– or –
Select the question mark icon in the taskbar.
2. Select Updates, and then select Check for updates and messages.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
4. At the download area, follow these steps:
a. Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your
computer. Make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to
locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive.
Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded.
You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update.
90 Chapter 7 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start in Windows 10
NOTE: If you connect your computer to a network, consult the network administrator before installing
any software updates, especially system BIOS updates.
BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are revealed on the screen after the download
is complete. If no instructions are revealed, follow these steps:
1. Type file in the taskbar search box, and then select File Explorer.
2. Select your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:).
3. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder that contains the update.
4. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe).
The BIOS installation begins.
5. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions.
NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file
from your hard drive.
Changing the boot order using the f9 prompt
To dynamically choose a boot device for the current startup sequence, follow these steps:
1. Access the Boot Device Options menu:
● Computers or tablets with keyboards:
▲ Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f9 to enter the Boot
Device Options menu.
● Tablets without keyboards:
▲ Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until
the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap F9 to enter the Boot Device Options menu.
2. Select a boot device, then press enter.
TPM BIOS settings (select products only)
IMPORTANT: Before enabling Trusted Platform Module (TPM) functionality on this system, you must ensure
that your intended use of TPM complies with relevant local laws, regulations and policies, and approvals or
licenses must be obtained if applicable. For any compliance issues arising from your operation/usage of TPM
which violates the above mentioned requirement, you shall bear all the liabilities wholly and solely. HP will
not be responsible for any related liabilities.
TPM provides additional security for your computer. You can modify the TPM settings in Computer Setup
(BIOS).
NOTE: If you change the TPM setting to Hidden, TPM is not visible in the operating system.
To access TPM settings in Computer Setup:
1. Start Computer Setup. See Starting Computer Setup on page 88.
2. Select Security, select TPM Embedded Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
TPM BIOS settings (select products only) 91
Using HP Sure Start (select products only)
Select computer models are configured with HP Sure Start, a technology that continuously monitors the
computer's BIOS for attacks or corruption. If the BIOS becomes corrupted or is attacked, HP Sure Start
automatically restores the BIOS to its previously safe state, without user intervention.
HP Sure Start is configured and already enabled so that most users can use the HP Sure Start default
configuration. The default configuration can be customized by advanced users.
To access the latest documentation on HP Sure Start, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Find your
product, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
92 Chapter 7 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start in Windows 10
8 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure
Start in Windows 8.1
Using Computer Setup
Computer Setup, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and
output devices on the system (such as disk drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Computer Setup
includes settings for the types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and the amount of
system and extended memory.
NOTE: Use extreme care when making changes in Computer Setup. Errors can prevent the computer from
operating properly.
Starting Computer Setup
NOTE: An external keyboard or mouse connected to a USB port can be used with Computer Setup only if USB
legacy support is enabled.
To start Computer Setup, follow these steps:
▲ Start Computer Setup.
● Computers or tablets with keyboards:
▲ Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer
Setup.
● Tablets without keyboards:
▲ Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until
the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap F10 to enter Computer Setup.
Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup
● To select a menu or a menu item, use the tab key and the keyboard arrow keys and then press enter, or
use a pointing device to select the item.
NOTE: On tablets without keyboards, you can use your finger to make selections.
● To scroll up and down, select the up arrow or the down arrow in the upper-right corner of the screen, or
use the up arrow key or the down arrow key on the keyboard.
● To close open dialog boxes and return to the main Computer Setup screen, press esc, and then follow
the on-screen instructions.
Using Computer Setup 93
To exit Computer Setup menus, choose one of the following methods:
● To exit Computer Setup menus without saving your changes:
Select the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
– or –
Select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter.
● To save your changes and exit Computer Setup menus:
Select the Save icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
– or –
Select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter.
Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts.
Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup
NOTE: Restoring defaults will not change the hard drive mode.
To return all settings in Computer Setup to the values that were set at the factory, follow these steps:
1. Start Computer Setup. See Starting Computer Setup on page 93.
2. Select Main, and then select Apply Factory Defaults and Exit.
NOTE: On select products, the selections may display Restore Defaults instead of Apply Factory
Defaults and Exit.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
4. To save your changes and exit, select the Save icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then
follow the on-screen instructions.
– or –
Select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter.
Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts.
NOTE: Your password settings and security settings are not changed when you restore the factory settings.
94 Chapter 8 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start in Windows 8.1
Updating the BIOS
Updated versions of the BIOS may be available on the HP website.
Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs.
Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing
and troubleshooting the file.
Determining the BIOS version
To decide whether you need to update Computer Setup (BIOS), first determine the BIOS version on your
computer.
BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) can be accessed by pressing fn+esc (if
you are already in Windows) or by using Computer Setup.
1. Start Computer Setup. See Starting Computer Setup on page 93.
2. Select Main, and then select System Information.
3. To exit Computer Setup without saving your changes, select the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the
screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
– or –
Select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter.
To check for later BIOS versions, see Downloading a BIOS update on page 95.
Downloading a BIOS update
CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and
install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do
not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional
docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these
instructions:
Do not disconnect power on the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet.
Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep.
Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord.
1. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app.
2. Make the selection for updates.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
4. At the download area, follow these steps:
a. Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your
computer. Make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to
locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive.
Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded.
You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update.
NOTE: If you connect your computer to a network, consult the network administrator before installing
any software updates, especially system BIOS updates.
Using Computer Setup 95
BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are revealed on the screen after the download
is complete. If no instructions are revealed, follow these steps:
1. From the Start screen, type file, and then select File Explorer.
2. Select your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:).
3. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder that contains the update.
4. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe).
The BIOS installation begins.
5. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions.
NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file
from your hard drive.
Changing the boot order using the f9 prompt
To dynamically choose a boot device for the current startup sequence, follow these steps:
1. Access the Boot Device Options menu:
● Computers or tablets with keyboards:
▲ Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f9 to enter the Boot
Device Options menu.
● Tablets without keyboards:
▲ Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until
the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap F9 to enter the Boot Device Options menu.
2. Select a boot device, then press enter.
TPM BIOS settings (select products only)
IMPORTANT: Before enabling Trusted Platform Module (TPM) functionality on this system, you must ensure
that your intended use of TPM complies with relevant local laws, regulations and policies, and approvals or
licenses must be obtained if applicable. For any compliance issues arising from your operation/usage of TPM
which violates the above mentioned requirement, you shall bear all the liabilities wholly and solely. HP will
not be responsible for any related liabilities.
TPM provides additional security for your computer. You can modify the TPM settings in Computer Setup
(BIOS).
NOTE: If you change the TPM setting to Hidden, TPM is not visible in the operating system.
To access TPM settings in Computer Setup:
1. Start Computer Setup. See Starting Computer Setup on page 93.
2. Select Security, select TPM Embedded Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
96 Chapter 8 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start in Windows 8.1
Using HP Sure Start (select products only)
Select computer models are configured with HP Sure Start, a technology that continuously monitors the
computer's BIOS for attacks or corruption. If the BIOS becomes corrupted or is attacked, HP Sure Start
automatically restores the BIOS to its previously safe state, without user intervention.
HP Sure Start is configured and already enabled so that most users can use the HP Sure Start default
configuration. The default configuration can be customized by advanced users.
To access the latest documentation on HP Sure Start, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Find your
product, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
Using HP Sure Start (select products only) 97
9 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure
Start in Windows 7
Using Computer Setup
Computer Setup, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and
output devices on the system (such as disk drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Computer Setup
includes settings for the types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and the amount of
system and extended memory.
NOTE: Use extreme care when making changes in Computer Setup. Errors can prevent the computer from
operating properly.
Starting Computer Setup
NOTE: An external keyboard or mouse connected to a USB port can be used with Computer Setup only if USB
legacy support is enabled.
To start Computer Setup, follow these steps:
▲ Start Computer Setup.
● Computers or tablets with keyboards:
▲ Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer
Setup.
● Tablets without keyboards:
▲ Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until
the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap F10 to enter Computer Setup.
Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup
● To select a menu or a menu item, use the tab key and the keyboard arrow keys and then press enter, or
use a pointing device to select the item.
NOTE: On tablets without keyboards, you can use your finger to make selections.
● To scroll up and down, select the up arrow or the down arrow in the upper-right corner of the screen, or
use the up arrow key or the down arrow key on the keyboard.
● To close open dialog boxes and return to the main Computer Setup screen, press esc, and then follow
the on-screen instructions.
98 Chapter 9 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start in Windows 7
To exit Computer Setup menus, choose one of the following methods:
● To exit Computer Setup menus without saving your changes:
Select the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
– or –
Select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter.
● To save your changes and exit Computer Setup menus:
Select the Save icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
– or –
Select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter.
Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts.
Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup
NOTE: Restoring defaults will not change the hard drive mode.
To return all settings in Computer Setup to the values that were set at the factory, follow these steps:
1. Start Computer Setup. See Starting Computer Setup on page 98.
2. Select Main, and then select Apply Factory Defaults and Exit.
NOTE: On select products, the selections may display Restore Defaults instead of Apply Factory
Defaults and Exit.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
4. To save your changes and exit, select the Save icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then
follow the on-screen instructions.
– or –
Select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter.
Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts.
NOTE: Your password settings and security settings are not changed when you restore the factory settings.
Using Computer Setup 99
Updating the BIOS
Updated versions of the BIOS may be available on the HP website.
Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs.
Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing
and troubleshooting the file.
Determining the BIOS version
To decide whether you need to update Computer Setup (BIOS), first determine the BIOS version on your
computer.
BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) can be accessed by pressing fn+esc (if
you are already in Windows) or by using Computer Setup.
1. Start Computer Setup. See Starting Computer Setup on page 98.
2. Select Main, and then select System Information.
3. To exit Computer Setup without saving your changes, select the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the
screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
– or –
Select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter.
To check for later BIOS versions, see Downloading a BIOS update on page 100.
Downloading a BIOS update
CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and
install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do
not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional
docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these
instructions:
Do not disconnect power on the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet.
Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep.
Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord.
1. Access Help and Support by selecting Start > All Programs > HP Help and Support > HP Support
Assistant.
2. Make the selection for updates.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
4. At the download area, follow these steps:
a. Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your
computer. Make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to
locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive.
b. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive.
Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded.
You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update.
100 Chapter 9 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start in Windows 7
NOTE: If you connect your computer to a network, consult the network administrator before installing
any software updates, especially system BIOS updates.
BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are revealed on the screen after the download
is complete. If no instructions are revealed, follow these steps:
1. Select Start > Computer.
2. Select your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:).
3. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder that contains the update.
4. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe).
The BIOS installation begins.
5. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions.
NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file
from your hard drive.
Changing the boot order using the f9 prompt
To dynamically choose a boot device for the current startup sequence, follow these steps:
1. Access the Boot Device Options menu:
● Computers or tablets with keyboards:
▲ Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f9 to enter the Boot
Device Options menu.
● Tablets without keyboards:
▲ Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until
the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap F9 to enter the Boot Device Options menu.
2. Select a boot device, then press enter.
TPM BIOS settings (select products only)
IMPORTANT: Before enabling Trusted Platform Module (TPM) functionality on this system, you must ensure
that your intended use of TPM complies with relevant local laws, regulations and policies, and approvals or
licenses must be obtained if applicable. For any compliance issues arising from your operation/usage of TPM
which violates the above mentioned requirement, you shall bear all the liabilities wholly and solely. HP will
not be responsible for any related liabilities.
TPM provides additional security for your computer. You can modify the TPM settings in Computer Setup
(BIOS).
NOTE: If you change the TPM setting to Hidden, TPM is not visible in the operating system.
To access TPM settings in Computer Setup:
1. Start Computer Setup. See Starting Computer Setup on page 98.
2. Select Security, select TPM Embedded Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
TPM BIOS settings (select products only) 101
Using HP Sure Start (select products only)
Select computer models are configured with HP Sure Start, a technology that continuously monitors the
computer's BIOS for attacks or corruption. If the BIOS becomes corrupted or is attacked, HP Sure Start
automatically restores the BIOS to its previously safe state, without user intervention.
HP Sure Start is configured and already enabled so that most users can use the HP Sure Start default
configuration. The default configuration can be customized by advanced users.
To access the latest documentation on HP Sure Start, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Find your
product, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
102 Chapter 9 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start in Windows 7
10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI)
HP PC Hardware Diagnostics is a Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) that allows you to run diagnostic
tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs outside the
operating system so that it can isolate hardware failures from issues that are caused by the operating system
or other software components.
When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-digit
Failure ID code is generated. This ID code can then be provided to support to help determine how to correct
the problem.
NOTE: To start diagnostics on a convertible computer, your computer must be in notebook mode and you
must use the keyboard attached.
To start HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI), follow these steps:
1. Turn on or restart the computer, and quickly press esc.
2. Press f2.
The BIOS searches three places for the diagnostic tools, in the following order:
a. Connected USB drive
NOTE: To download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) tool to a USB drive, see Downloading
HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device on page 103.
b. Hard drive
c. BIOS
3. When the diagnostic tool opens, select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the
on-screen instructions.
NOTE: If you need to stop a diagnostic test, press esc.
Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device
NOTE: The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) download instructions are provided in English only, and you
must use a Windows computer to download and create the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe
files are offered.
There are two options to download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics to a USB device.
Download the latest UEFI version
1. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed.
2. In the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics section, click the Download link, and then select Run.
Download any version of UEFI for a specific product
1. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, and then select your country. The HP Support page is displayed.
2. Click Drivers & Downloads.
Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device 103
3. Use the categories listed to find your product.
– or –
Click Find Now to let HP automatically detect your product.
4. Select your computer, and then select your operating system.
5. In the Diagnostic section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the UEFI version
you want.
104 Chapter 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI)
11 Backup and recovery
This chapter provides information about the following processes. The information in the chapter is standard
procedure for most products.
● Creating recovery media and backups
● Restoring and recovering your system
For additional information, refer to the HP support assistant app.
▲ Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app.
‒ or –
Click the question mark icon in the taskbar.
IMPORTANT: If you will be performing recovery procedures on a tablet, the tablet battery must be at least
70% charged before you start the recovery process.
IMPORTANT: For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the keyboard to the keyboard dock before
beginning any recovery process.
Creating recovery media and backups
The following methods of creating recovery media and backups are available on select products only. Choose
the available method according to your computer model.
● Use HP Recovery Manager to create HP Recovery media after you successfully set up the computer. This
step creates a backup of the HP Recovery partition on the computer. The backup can be used to reinstall
the original operating system in cases where the hard drive is corrupted or has been replaced. For
information on creating recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only)
on page 105. For information on the recovery options that are available using the recovery media, see
Using Windows tools on page 106.
● Use Windows tools to create system restore points and create backups of personal information.
For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 107.
NOTE: If storage is 32 GB or less, Microsoft System Restore is disabled by default.
Creating HP Recovery media (select products only)
If possible, check for the presence of the Recovery partition and the Windows partition. From the Start menu,
select File Explorer, and then select This PC.
● If your computer does not list the Windows partition and the Recovery partition, you can obtain recovery
media for your system from support. See the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the
computer. You can also find contact information on the HP website. Go to http://www.hp.com/support,
select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions.
Creating recovery media and backups 105
You can use Windows tools to create system restore points and create backups of personal information,
see Using Windows tools on page 106.
● If your computer does list the Recovery partition and the Windows partition, you can use HP Recovery
Manager to create recovery media after you successfully set up the computer. HP Recovery media can be
used to perform system recovery if the hard drive becomes corrupted. System recovery reinstalls the
original operating system and software programs that were installed at the factory and then configures
the settings for the programs. HP Recovery media can also be used to customize the system or restore
the factory image if you replace the hard drive.
◦ Only one set of recovery media can be created. Handle these recovery tools carefully, and keep
them in a safe place.
◦ HP Recovery Manager examines the computer and determines the required storage capacity for
the media that will be required.
◦ To create recovery discs, your computer must have an optical drive with DVD writer capability, and
you must use only high-quality blank DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-R DL, or DVD+R DL discs. Do not use
rewritable discs such as CD±RW, DVD±RW, double-layer DVD±RW, or BD-RE (rewritable Blu-ray)
discs; they are not compatible with HP Recovery Manager software. Or, instead, you can use a high-
quality blank USB flash drive.
◦ If your computer does not include an integrated optical drive with DVD writer capability, but you
would like to create DVD recovery media, you can use an external optical drive (purchased
separately) to create recovery discs. If you use an external optical drive, it must be connected
directly to a USB port on the computer; the drive cannot be connected to a USB port on an external
device, such as a USB hub. If you cannot create DVD media yourself, you can obtain recovery discs
for your computer from HP. See the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the
computer. You can also find contact information on the HP website. Go to http://www.hp.com/
support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions.
◦ Be sure that the computer is connected to AC power before you begin creating the recovery media.
◦ The creation process can take an hour or more. Do not interrupt the creation process.
◦ If necessary, you can exit the program before you have finished creating all of the recovery DVDs.
HP Recovery Manager will finish burning the current DVD. The next time you start HP Recovery
Manager, you will be prompted to continue.
To create HP Recovery media:
IMPORTANT: For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the keyboard to the keyboard dock before
beginning these steps.
1. Type recovery in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Recovery Manager.
2. Select Create recovery media, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
If you ever need to recover the system, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 107.
Using Windows tools
You can create recovery media, system restore points, and backups of personal information using Windows
tools.
NOTE: If storage is 32 GB or less, Microsoft System Restore is disabled by default.
For more information and steps, see the Get started app.
▲ Select the Start button, and then select the Get started app.
106 Chapter 11 Backup and recovery
Restore and recovery
There are several options for recovering your system. Choose the method that best matches your situation
and level of expertise:
IMPORTANT: Not all methods are available on all products.
● Windows offers several options for restoring from backup, refreshing the computer, and resetting the
computer to its original state. For more information see the Get started app.
▲ Select the Start button, and then select the Get started app.
● If you need to correct a problem with a preinstalled application or driver, use the Reinstall drivers and/or
applications option (select products only) of HP Recovery Manager to reinstall the individual application
or driver.
▲ Type recovery in the taskbar search box, select HP Recovery Manager, select Reinstall drivers
and/or applications, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
● If you want to recover the Windows partition to original factory content, you can choose the System
Recovery option from the HP Recovery partition (select products only) or use the HP Recovery media.
For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 107. If you have not already
created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 105.
● On select products, if you want to recover the computer's original factory partition and content, or if you
have replaced the hard drive, you can use the Factory Reset option of HP Recovery media. For more
information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 107.
● On select products, if you want to remove the recovery partition to reclaim hard drive space, HP
Recovery Manager offers the Remove Recovery Partition option.
For more information, see Removing the HP Recovery partition (select products only) on page 110.
Recovering using HP Recovery Manager
HP Recovery Manager software allows you to recover the computer to its original factory state by using the
HP Recovery media that you either created or that you obtained from HP, or by using the HP Recovery
partition (select products only). If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery
media (select products only) on page 105.
What you need to know before you get started
● HP Recovery Manager recovers only software that was installed at the factory. For software not provided
with this computer, you must either download the software from the manufacturer's website or reinstall
the software from the media provided by the manufacturer.
IMPORTANT: Recovery through HP Recovery Manager should be used as a final attempt to correct
computer issues.
● HP Recovery media must be used if the computer hard drive fails. If you have not already created
recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 105.
● To use the Factory Reset option (select products only), you must use HP Recovery media. If you have not
already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 105.
● If your computer does not allow the creation of HP Recovery media or if the HP Recovery media does not
work, you can obtain recovery media for your system from support. See the Worldwide Telephone
Numbers booklet included with the computer. You can also find contact information from the HP
Restore and recovery 107
website. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen
instructions.
IMPORTANT: HP Recovery Manager does not automatically provide backups of your personal data. Before
beginning recovery, back up any personal data you want to retain.
Using HP Recovery media, you can choose from one of the following recovery options:
NOTE: Only the options available for your computer display when you start the recovery process.
● System Recovery—Reinstalls the original operating system, and then configures the settings for the
programs that were installed at the factory.
● Factory Reset—Restores the computer to its original factory state by deleting all information from the
hard drive and re-creating the partitions. Then it reinstalls the operating system and the software that
was installed at the factory.
The HP Recovery partition (select products only) allows System Recovery only.
Using the HP Recovery partition (select products only)
The HP Recovery partition allows you to perform a system recovery without the need for recovery discs or a
recovery USB flash drive. This type of recovery can be used only if the hard drive is still working.
To start HP Recovery Manager from the HP Recovery partition:
IMPORTANT: For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the keyboard to the keyboard dock before
beginning these steps (select products only).
1. Type recovery in the taskbar search box, select Recovery Manager, and then select HP Recovery
Environment.
- or-
For computers or tablets with keyboards attached, press f11 while the computer boots, or press and
hold f11 as you press the power button.
For tablets without keyboards:
Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button; then select f11.
- or -
Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the Windows button; then select f11.
2. Select Troubleshoot from the boot options menu.
3. Select Recovery Manager, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
Using HP Recovery media to recover
You can use HP Recovery media to recover the original system. This method can be used if your system does
not have an HP Recovery partition or if the hard drive is not working properly.
1. If possible, back up all personal files.
2. Insert the HP Recovery media, and then restart the computer.
NOTE: If the computer does not automatically restart in HP Recovery Manager, change the computer
boot order. See Changing the computer boot order on page 109.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
108 Chapter 11 Backup and recovery
Changing the computer boot order
If your computer does not restart in HP Recovery Manager, you can change the computer boot order, which is
the order of devices listed in BIOS where the computer looks for startup information. You can change the
selection to an optical drive or a USB flash drive.
To change the boot order:
IMPORTANT: For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the keyboard to the keyboard dock before
beginning these steps.
1. Insert the HP Recovery media.
2. Access BIOS:
For computers or tablets with keyboards attached:
▲ Turn on or restart the computer or tablet, quickly press esc, and then press f9 for boot options.
For tablets without keyboards:
▲ Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button; then select f9.
- or -
Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the Windows button; then select f9.
3. Select the optical drive or USB flash drive from which you want to boot.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Restore and recovery 109
Removing the HP Recovery partition (select products only)
HP Recovery Manager software allows you to remove the HP Recovery partition to free up hard drive space.
IMPORTANT: After you remove the HP Recovery partition, you will not be able to perform System Recovery
or create HP recovery media from the HP Recovery partition. So before you remove the Recovery partition,
create HP Recovery media; see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 105.
NOTE: The Remove Recovery Partition option is only available on products that support this function.
Follow these steps to remove the HP Recovery partition:
1. Type recovery in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Recovery Manager.
2. Select Remove Recovery Partition, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
110 Chapter 11 Backup and recovery
12 Backup and recovery in Windows 8.1
To protect your information, use Windows backup and restore utilities to back up individual files and folders,
back up your entire hard drive, create system repair media (select products only) by using the installed optical
drive (select products only) or an optional external optical drive, or create system restore points. In case of
system failure, you can use the backup files to restore the contents of your computer.
From the Start screen, type restore, and then select from the list of displayed options.
NOTE: For detailed instructions on various backup and restore options, perform a search for these topics in
Windows Help and Support.
In case of system instability, HP recommends that you print the recovery procedures and save them for later
use.
NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You
may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running utilities, or
changing Windows settings. For more information, see Windows Help and Support.
Backing up your information
Recovery after a system failure is as good as your most recent backup. You should create system repair media
and your initial backup immediately after initial system setup. As you add new software and data files, you
should continue to back up your system on a regular basis to maintain a reasonably current backup.
For more information on the Windows backup features, see Windows Help and Support.
Performing a system recovery
In case of system failure or instability, the computer provides the following tools to recover your files:
● Windows recovery tools: You can use Windows Backup and Restore to recover information you have
previously backed up. You can also use Windows Automatic Repair to fix problems that might prevent
Windows from starting correctly.
● f11 recovery tools: You can use the f11 recovery tools to recover your original hard drive image. The
image includes the Windows operating system and software programs installed at the factory.
NOTE: If you are unable to boot (start up) your computer and you cannot use the system repair media you
previously created (select products only), you must purchase Windows operating system media to reboot the
computer and repair the operating system. For additional information, see Using Windows operating system
media (purchased separately) on page 113.
Using the Windows recovery tools
To recover information you previously backed up, see Windows Help and Support for steps on restoring files
and folders.
To recover your information using Automatic Repair, follow these steps:
Backing up your information 111
CAUTION: Some Startup Repair options will completely erase and reformat the hard drive. All files you have
created and any software installed on the computer are permanently removed. When reformatting is
complete, the recovery process restores the operating system, as well as the drivers, software, and utilities
from the backup used for recovery.
1. If possible, back up all personal files.
2. If possible, check for the presence of the Recovery Image partition and the Windows partition.
From the Start screen, type file, and then click File Explorer.
– or –
From the Start screen, type pc, and then select This PC.
NOTE: If the Windows partition and the Recovery Image partition are not listed, you must recover your
operating system and programs using the Windows operating system DVD and the Driver Recovery
media (both purchased separately). For additional information, see Using Windows operating system
media (purchased separately) on page 113.
3. If the Windows partition and the Recovery Image partition are listed, restart the computer by pressing
and holding the shift key while clicking Restart.
4. Select Troubleshoot, then select Advanced Options, and then select Startup Repair.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions.
NOTE: For additional information on recovering information using the Windows tools, perform a search for
these topics in Windows Help and Support.
Using f11 recovery tools
CAUTION: Using f11 completely erases hard drive contents and reformats the hard drive. All files that you
have created and any software that you have installed on the computer are permanently removed. The f11
recovery tool reinstalls the operating system and HP programs and drivers that were installed at the factory.
Software not installed at the factory must be reinstalled.
To recover the original hard drive image using f11:
1. If possible, back up all personal files.
2. If possible, check for the presence of the Recovery Image partition: From the Start screen, type pc, and
then select This PC.
NOTE: If the Recovery Image partition is not listed, you must recover your operating system and
programs using the Windows operating system media and the Driver Recovery media (both purchased
separately). For additional information, see Using Windows operating system media (purchased
separately) on page 113.
3. If the Recovery Image partition is listed, restart the computer, and then press esc while the "Press the
ESC key for Startup Menu" message is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
4. Press f11 while the "Press <F11> for recovery" message is displayed on the screen.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions.
112 Chapter 12 Backup and recovery in Windows 8.1
Using Windows operating system media (purchased separately)
To order a Windows operating system DVD, contact support. See the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet
included with the computer. You can also find contact information from the HP website. Go to
http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions.
CAUTION: Using a Windows operating system media completely erases hard drive contents and reformats
the hard drive. All files that you have created and any software that you have installed on the computer are
permanently removed. When reformatting is complete, the recovery process helps you restore the operating
system, as well as drivers, software, and utilities.
To initiate a full install of the operating system using a Windows operating system DVD:
NOTE: This process takes several minutes.
1. If possible, back up all personal files.
2. Insert the Windows operating system DVD into the optical drive, and then restart the computer.
3. When prompted, press any keyboard key.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
After the installation is completed:
1. Eject the Windows operating system media and then insert the Driver Recovery media.
2. Install the Hardware Enabling Drivers first, and then install Recommended Applications.
Using Windows Refresh or Windows Reset
When your computer is not working properly and you need to regain system stability, the Windows Refresh
option allows you to start fresh and keep what is important to you.
The Windows Reset option allows you to perform detailed reformatting of your computer, or remove personal
information before you give away or recycle your computer. For more information on these features, see
Windows Help and Support.
Using HP Software Setup
HP Software Setup can be used to reinstall drivers or select software that has been corrupted or deleted from
the system.
1. From the Start screen, type HP Software Setup.
2. Open HP Software Setup.
3. Follow the on-screen directions to reinstall drivers or select software.
Performing a system recovery 113
13 Backup and recovery in Windows 7
Your computer includes HP and Windows tools to help you safeguard your information and retrieve it if you
ever need to. These tools will help you return your computer to a proper working state, all with simple steps.
This section provides information about the following processes:
● Creating recovery media and backups
● Restoring and recovering your system
Creating recovery media and backups
Recovery after a system failure is only as good as your most recent backup.
1. After you successfully set up the computer, create HP Recovery media. This step creates a Windows 7
operating system DVD and a Driver Recovery DVD. The Windows DVD can be used to reinstall the original
operating system in cases where the hard drive is corrupted or has been replaced. The Driver Recovery
DVD installs specific drivers and applications. See Creating recovery media with HP Recovery Disc
Creator on page 114.
2. Use Windows Backup and Recovery tools to perform the following:
● Back up individual files and folders
● Back up your entire hard drive (select products only)
● Create system repair discs (select products only) with the installed optical drive (select products
only) or an optional external optical drive
● Create system restore points
NOTE: This guide describes an overview of backing up, restoring, and recovering options. For more details
about the tools provided, see Help and Support. To access Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support.
NOTE: HP recommends that you print the recovery procedures and save them for later use, in case of
system instability.
In case of system failure, you can use the backup files to restore the contents of your computer. See Backing
up your information on page 115.
Guidelines
● When creating recovery media or backing up to discs, use any of the following types of discs (purchased
separately): DVD+R, DVD+R DL, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, or DVD-RW. The discs you use will depend on the type
of optical drive you are using.
● Be sure that the computer is connected to AC power before you start the recovery media creation
process or the backup process.
Creating recovery media with HP Recovery Disc Creator
HP Recovery Disc Creator is a software program that offers an alternative way to create recovery media. After
you successfully set up the computer, you can create recovery media using HP Recovery Disc Creator. This
recovery media allows you to reinstall your original operating system as well as select drivers and
114 Chapter 13 Backup and recovery in Windows 7
applications if the hard drive becomes corrupted. HP Recovery Disc Creator can create two kinds of recovery
DVDs:
● Windows 7 operating system DVD—Installs the operating system without additional drivers or
applications.
● Driver Recovery DVD—Installs specific drivers and applications only, in the same way that the HP
Software Setup utility installs drivers and applications.
Creating recovery media
NOTE: The Windows 7 operating system DVD can be created only once. Thereafter, the option to create that
media will not be available after you create a Windows DVD.
To create the Windows DVD:
1. Select Start > All Programs > Productivity and Tools > HP Recovery Disc Creator.
2. Select Windows disk.
3. From the drop-down menu, select the drive for burning the recovery media.
4. Click the Create button to start the burning process.
After the Windows 7 operating system DVD has been created, create the Driver Recovery DVD:
1. Select Start > All Programs > Productivity and Tools > HP Recovery Disc Creator.
2. Select Driver disk.
3. From the drop-down menu, select the drive for burning the recovery media.
4. Click the Create button to start the burning process.
Backing up your information
You should create system repair media and your initial backup immediately after initial system setup. As you
add new software and data files, you should continue to back up your system on a regular basis to maintain a
reasonably current backup. You should also create Windows system repair media (select products only) which
can be used to start up (boot) the computer and repair the operating system in case of system instability or
failure. Your initial and subsequent backups allow you to restore your data and settings if a failure occurs.
You can back up your information to an optional external hard drive, a network drive, or discs.
Note the following when backing up:
● Store personal files in the Documents library, and back it up regularly.
● Back up templates that are stored in their associated directories.
● Save customized settings that appear in a window, toolbar, or menu bar by taking a screen shot of your
settings. The screen shot can be a time-saver if you have to reset your preferences.
● When backing up to discs, number each disc after removing it from the drive.
NOTE: For detailed instructions on various backup and restore options, perform a search for these topics in
Help and Support. To access Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support.
NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You
may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running utilities, or
changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support. To access Help and Support, select Start > Help and
Support.
Creating recovery media and backups 115
To create a backup using Windows Backup and Restore:
NOTE: The backup process may take over an hour, depending on file size and the speed of the computer.
1. Select Start > All Programs > Maintenance > Backup and Restore.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up your backup, create a system image (select products only),
or create system repair media (select products only).
Performing a system recovery
In case of system failure or instability, the computer provides the following tools to recover your files:
● Windows recovery tools: You can use Windows Backup and Restore to recover information you have
previously backed up. You can also use Windows Startup Repair to fix problems that might prevent
Windows from starting correctly.
● f11 recovery tools (select products only): You can use the f11 recovery tools to recover your original
hard drive image. The image includes the Windows operating system and software programs installed at
the factory.
NOTE: If you are unable to boot (start up) your computer and you cannot use the system repair media you
previously created (select products only), you must purchase Windows 7 operating system media to reboot
the computer and repair the operating system. For additional information, see Using Windows 7 operating
system media on page 117.
Using the Windows recovery tools
Using the Windows recovery tools, you can:
● Recover individual files
● Restore the computer to a previous system restore point
● Recover information using recovery tools
NOTE: For detailed instructions on various recovery and restore options, perform a search for these topics
in Help and Support. To access Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support.
NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You
may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running utilities, or
changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support. To access Help and Support, select Start > Help and
Support.
To recover information you previously backed up:
1. Select Start > All Programs > Maintenance > Backup and Restore.
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to recover your system settings, your computer (select products only),
or your files.
To recover your information using Startup Repair, follow these steps:
CAUTION: Some Startup Repair options will completely erase and reformat the hard drive. All files you have
created and any software installed on the computer are permanently removed. When reformatting is
complete, the recovery process restores the operating system, as well as the drivers, software, and utilities
from the backup used for recovery.
116 Chapter 13 Backup and recovery in Windows 7
1. If possible, back up all personal files.
2. If possible, check for the presence of the Windows partition.
To check for the Windows partition, select Start > Computer.
NOTE: If the Windows partition is not listed, you must recover your operating system and programs
using the Windows 7 operating system DVD and the Driver Recovery media. For additional information,
see Using Windows 7 operating system media on page 117.
3. If the Windows partition is listed, restart the computer, and then press f8 before the Windows operating
system loads.
4. Select Startup Repair.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions.
NOTE: For additional information on recovering information using the Windows tools, select Start > Help
and Support.
Using f11 recovery tools (select products only)
CAUTION: Using f11 completely erases hard drive contents and reformats the hard drive. All files that you
have created and any software that you have installed on the computer are permanently removed. The f11
recovery tool reinstalls the operating system and HP programs and drivers that were installed at the factory.
Software not installed at the factory must be reinstalled.
To recover the original hard drive image using f11:
1. If possible, back up all personal files.
2. If possible, check for the presence of the HP Recovery partition: click Start, right-click Computer, click
Manage, and then click Disk Management.
NOTE: If the HP Recovery partition is not listed, you must recover your operating system and programs
using the Windows 7 operating system media and the Driver Recovery media. For additional information,
see Using Windows 7 operating system media on page 117.
3. If the HP Recovery partition is listed, restart the computer, and then press esc while the "Press the ESC
key for Startup Menu" message is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
4. Press f11 while the "Press <F11> for recovery" message is displayed on the screen.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Using Windows 7 operating system media
If you cannot use the recovery media you previously created using the HP Recovery Disc Creator (select
products only), you must purchase a Windows 7 operating system DVD to reboot the computer and repair the
operating system.
To order a Windows 7 operating system DVD, go to the HP website. For U.S. support, go to
http://www.hp.com/support. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/
wwcontact_us.html. You can also order the DVD by calling support. For contact information, see the
Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer.
CAUTION: Using a Windows 7 operating system DVD completely erases hard drive contents and reformats
the hard drive. All files that you have created and any software that you have installed on the computer are
permanently removed. When reformatting is complete, the recovery process helps you restore the operating
system, as well as drivers, software, and utilities.
Performing a system recovery 117
To initiate recovery using a Windows 7 operating system DVD:
NOTE: This process takes several minutes.
1. If possible, back up all personal files.
2. Restart the computer, and then insert the Windows 7 operating system DVD into the optical drive before
the Windows operating system loads.
3. When prompted, press any keyboard key.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
5. Click Next.
6. Select Repair your computer.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions.
After the repair is completed:
1. Eject the Windows 7 operating system DVD and then insert the Driver Recovery DVD.
2. Install the Hardware Enabling Drivers first, and then install Recommended Applications.
118 Chapter 13 Backup and recovery in Windows 7
14 Specifications
Computer specifications
15" products 14" products
Dimensions
Width 378 (14.88 in) 340 (13.39 in)
Depth 257 (10.11 in) 237 (9.33 in)
Height (front to back) 27.4 (1.07 in) 27 (1.06 in)
Weight 5.1 or 5.37 lbs(depending on
configuration)
4.3 or 4.57 lbs (depending
on configuration)
Input power
Operating voltage and current 19.5 V dc @ 2.3 – 45 W (select products only)
19.5 V dc @ 3.33 A – 65 W
19 V dc @ 4.6 A – 90 W (only for products with an Intel quad-
core processor)
Temperature
Operating 5°C to 35°C (41°F to 95°F)
Nonoperating –20°C to 60°C (–4°F to
140°F)
Relative humidity (noncondensing)
Operating 10% to 90%
Nonoperating 5% to 95%
Maximum altitude (unpressurized)
Operating –15 m to 3,048 m (–50 ft to
10,000 ft)
Nonoperating –15 m to 12,192 m (–50 ft to
40,000 ft)
NOTE: Applicable product safety standards specify thermal limits for plastic surfaces. The device operates well within this range of
temperatures.
Computer specifications 119
Hard drive specifications
1-TB, 5400-rpm
SATA*
750-GB, 5400-rpm
Hybrid SATA 8GB
NAND **
500-GB, 7200-rpm
FIPS SATA Opal2 **
500-GB, 7200-rpm
SATA **
500-GB,
7200-rpm
self-
encrypting
SATA Opal2
**
Dimensions
Height 7.2 mm (0.28 in)
Width 69.85 mm (2.75 in)
Weight 99 g max
Interface type SATA
Transfer rate
Synchronous (maximum) 600 MB/s
Security ATA security
Seek times (typical read, including setting)
Single track 1.5 ms
Average (read/write) 12.0 ms
Maximum 22 ms
Logical blocks 1,953,525,168 976,773,168
Disk rotational speed 5400 rpm 7200 rpm
Operating temperature 0°C to 60°C (32°F to 140°F)
*1 TB = 1 trillion bytes when referring to hard drive storage capacity. Actual accessible capacity is less.
**1 GB = 1 billion bytes when referring to hard drive storage capacity. Actual accessible capacity is less.
NOTE: Certain restrictions and exclusions apply. Contact technical support for details.
Solid-state drive specifications
128 GB
2280 M2
SATA-3
TLC*
180 GB
2280 M2
SATA-3
MLC*
180 GB
2280 M2
SATA-3
self-
encryptin
g MLC
(Opal 2 *
240 GB
2280 M2
SATA-3
MLC*
256 GB
2280 M2
PCIe-3x4
NVMe MLC*
256 GB
2280 M2
SATA-3
self-
encryptin
g MLC
(Opal 2)*
256 GB
2280 M2
SATA-3
TLC*
512 GB
SATA - 3
TLC*
Dimensions
Weight 10 g
Height 2.38 mm (0.09 in)
Width 22 mm (0.87 in)
Interface type SATA Gen 3.0 (6 Gb/s)
120 Chapter 14 Specifications
128 GB
2280 M2
SATA-3
TLC*
180 GB
2280 M2
SATA-3
MLC*
180 GB
2280 M2
SATA-3
self-
encryptin
g MLC
(Opal 2 *
240 GB
2280 M2
SATA-3
MLC*
256 GB
2280 M2
PCIe-3x4
NVMe MLC*
256 GB
2280 M2
SATA-3
self-
encryptin
g MLC
(Opal 2)*
256 GB
2280 M2
SATA-3
TLC*
512 GB
SATA - 3
TLC*
Performance
Maximum sequential
read
Up to 540
MB/s
Up to 540
MB/s
(Compress
ible
Performan
ce)
Up to 540
MB/s
(Compress
ible
Performa
nce)
Up to 540
MB/s
(Compress
ible
Performan
ce)
Up to 2260
MB/s
Up to 540
MB/s
Up to 540
MB/s
Up to 540
MB/s
Maximum sequential
write
Up to 300
MB/s
Up to 490
MB/s
(Compress
ible
Performan
ce)
Up to 490
MB/s
(Compress
ible
Performa
nce)
Up to 490
MB/s
(Compress
ible
Performan
ce)
Up to 1260
MB/s
Up to 460
MB/s
Up to 455
MB/s
Up to 500
MB/s
Security ATA-8 security
Logical blocks 250,069,68
0
351,651,8
88
351,651,8
88
468,862,1
28
500,118,19
2
500,118,1
92
500,118,1
92
1,000,215,
216
Operating temperature 0°C to 70° C (32° F to 158° F) [ambient temp]
Features DIPM; TRIM;
DVESLP
DIPM;
TRIM;
DEVSLP
TCG OPAL
2.x; DIPM;
TRIM;
DEVSLP
TCG OPAL
2.x; DIPM;
TRIM;
DEVSLP
PCIe
Gen3x4 ,
TRIM, L1.2
TCG OPAL
2.x, DIPM;
TRIM;
DEVSLP
DIPM;
TRIM;
DEVSLP
DIPM;
TRIM;
DEVSLP
*1 TB = 1 trillion bytes when referring to hard drive storage capacity. Actual accessible capacity is less.
NOTE: Certain restrictions and exclusions apply. Contact technical support for details.
Solid-state drive specifications 121
15 Power cord set requirements
The wide-range input feature of the computer permits it to operate from any line voltage from 100 to 120
volts AC, or from 220 to 240 volts AC.
The 3-conductor power cord set included with the computer meets the requirements for use in the country or
region where the equipment is purchased.
Power cord sets for use in other countries and regions must meet the requirements of the country or region
where the computer is used.
Requirements for all countries
The following requirements are applicable to all countries and regions:
● The length of the power cord set must be at least 1.0 m (3.3 ft) and no more than 2.0 m (6.5 ft).
● All power cord sets must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for evaluation in
the country or region where the power cord set will be used.
● The power cord sets must have a minimum current capacity of 10 amps and a nominal voltage rating of
125 or 250 V AC, as required by the power system of each country or region.
● The appliance coupler must meet the mechanical configuration of an EN 60 320/IEC 320 Standard Sheet
C13 connector for mating with the appliance inlet on the back of the computer.
Requirements for specific countries and regions
Country/region Accredited agency Applicable note number
Australia EANSW 1
Austria OVE 1
Belgium CEBC 1
Canada CSA 2
Denmark DEMKO 1
Finland FIMKO 1
France UTE 1
Germany VDE 1
Italy IMQ 1
Japan METI 3
The Netherlands KEMA 1
Norway NEMKO 1
The People's Republic of China COC 5
South Korea EK 4
122 Chapter 15 Power cord set requirements
Country/region Accredited agency Applicable note number
Sweden SEMKO 1
Switzerland SEV 1
Taiwan BSMI 4
The United Kingdom BSI 1
The United States UL 2
1. The flexible cord must be Type HO5VV-F, 3-conductor, 1.0-mm conductor size. Power cord set fittings (appliance coupler and wall
plug) must bear the certification mark of the agency responsible for evaluation in the country or region where it will be used.
2. The flexible cord must be Type SPT-3 or equivalent, No. 18 AWG, 3-conductor. The wall plug must be a two-pole grounding type
with a NEMA 5-15P (15 A, 125 V) or NEMA 6-15P (15 A, 250 V) configuration.
3. The appliance coupler, flexible cord, and wall plug must bear a T mark and registration number in accordance with the Japanese
Dentori Law. The flexible cord must be Type VCT or VCTF, 3-conductor, 1.00-mm conductor size. The wall plug must be a two-
pole grounding type with a Japanese Industrial Standard C8303 (7 A, 125 V) configuration.
4. The flexible cord must be Type RVV, 3-conductor, 0.75-mm conductor size. Power cord set fittings (appliance coupler and wall
plug) must bear the certification mark of the agency responsible for evaluation in the country or region where it will be used.
5. The flexible cord must be Type VCTF, 3-conductor, 0.75-mm conductor size. Power cord set fittings (appliance coupler and wall
plug) must bear the certification mark of the agency responsible for evaluation in the country or region where it will be used.
Requirements for specific countries and regions 123
16 Statement of memory volatility
The purpose of this chapter is to provide general information regarding nonvolatile memory in HP Business
PCs. This chapter also provides general instructions for restoring nonvolatile memory that can contain
personal data after the system has been powered off and the hard drive has been removed.
HP Business PC products that use Intel -based or AMD -based system boards contain volatile DDR memory.
The amount of nonvolatile memory present in the system depends upon the system configuration. Intel-
based and AMD-based system boards contain nonvolatile memory subcomponents as originally shipped from
HP, assuming that no subsequent modifications have been made to the system and assuming that no
applications, features, or functionality have been added to or installed on the system.
Following system shutdown and removal of all power sources from an HP Business PC system, personal data
can remain on volatile system memory (DIMMs) for a finite period of time and will also remain in nonvolatile
memory. Use the steps below to remove personal data from the PC, including the nonvolatile memory found
in Intel-based and AMD-based system boards.
NOTE: If your tablet has a keyboard base, connect to the keyboard base before beginning steps in this
chapter.
Current BIOS steps
1. Follow steps (a) through (l) below to restore the nonvolatile memory that can contain personal data.
Restoring or reprogramming nonvolatile memory that does not store personal data is neither necessary
nor recommended.
a. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the “Press the ESC key for Startup Menu”
“message is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
IMPORTANT: If the Main menu displays Restore Defaults instead of Apply Factory Defaults and
Exit, go to Legacy BIOS Steps on page 125.
NOTE: If the system has a BIOS administrator password, enter the password at the prompt.
b. Select Main, select Apply Factory Defaults and Exit, and then select Yes to load defaults.
The computer will reboot.
c. During the reboot, press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at
the bottom of the screen.
NOTE: If the system has a BIOS administrator password, enter the password at the prompt.
d. Select the Security menu, select Restore Security Settings to Factory Defaults, and then select
Yes to restore security level defaults.
The computer will reboot.
e. During the reboot, press esc while the “Press the ESC key for Startup Menu” message is displayed
at the bottom of the screen.
NOTE: If the system has a BIOS administrator password, enter the password at the prompt.
f. If an asset or ownership tag is set, select the Security menu and scroll down to the Utilities menu.
Select System IDs, and then select Asset Tracking Number. Clear the tag, and then make the
selection to return to the prior menu.
124 Chapter 16 Statement of memory volatility
g. If a DriveLock password is set, select the Security menu, and scroll down to Hard Drive Utilities
under the Utilities menu. Select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock, then uncheck the checkbox
for DriveLock password on restart. Select OK to proceed.
h. Select the Main menu, and then select Reset BIOS Security to factory default. Click Yes at the
warning message.
The computer will reboot.
i. During the reboot, press esc while the “Press the ESC key for Startup Menu” message is displayed
at the bottom of the screen.
NOTE: If the system has a BIOS administrator password, enter the password at the prompt.
j. Select the Main menu, select Apply Factory Defaults and Exit, select Yes to save changes and exit,
and then select Shutdown.
k. Reboot the system. If the system has a Trusted Platform Module (TPM) and/or fingerprint reader,
one or two prompts will appear one to clear the TPM and the other to Reset Fingerprint Sensor;
press or tap F1 to accept or F2 to reject.
l. Remove all power and system batteries for at least 24 hours.
2. Complete one of the following:
● Remove and retain the storage drive.
– or –
● Clear the drive contents by using a third party utility designed to erase data from an SSD.
– or –
● Clear the contents of the drive by using the following BIOS Setup Secure Erase command option
steps:
IMPORTANT: If you clear data using Secure Erase, it cannot be recovered.
a. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the “Press the ESC key for Startup Menu”
“message is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
b. Select the Security menu and scroll down to the Utilities menu.
c. Select Hard Drive Tools.
d. Under Utilities, select Secure Erase, select the hard drive storing the data you want to clear, and
then follow the on-screen instructions to continue.
Legacy BIOS Steps
Use the steps for older versions of BIOS.
NOTE: If you already completed the steps in Current BIOS steps on page 124, skip this section.
1. Follow steps (a) through (i) below to restore the nonvolatile memory that can contain personal data.
Restoring or reprogramming nonvolatile memory that does not store personal data is neither necessary
nor recommended.
NOTE: If you have not already done so, access the BIOS menu.
● Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the “Press the ESC key for Startup Menu”
“message is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
125
NOTE: If the system has a BIOS administrator password, enter the password at the prompt.
a. Select Main, select Restore Defaults, and then select Yes to load defaults.
b. Select the Security menu, select Restore Security Level Defaults, and then select Yes to restore
security level defaults.
c. If an asset or ownership tag is set, select the Security menu and scroll down to the Utilities menu.
Select System IDs, and then select Asset Tracking Number. Clear the tag, and then make the
selection to return to the prior menu.
d. If a DriveLock password is set, select the Security menu, and scroll down to Hard Drive Tools
under the Utilities menu. Select Hard Drive Tools, select DriveLock, then uncheck the checkbox
for DriveLock password on restart. Select OK to proceed.
e. If an Automatic DriveLock password is set, select the Security menu, scroll down to Hard Drive
Tools under the Utilities menu. Select Hard Drive Tools, scroll down to Automatic DriveLock, then
select the desired hard drive and disable protection. At the automatic drive lock warning screen,
select Yes to continue. Repeat this procedure if more than one hard drive has an Automatic
DriveLock password.
f. Select the Main menu, and then select Reset BIOS Security to factory default. Click Yes at the
warning message.
g. Select the Main menu, select Save Changes and Exit, select Yes to save changes and exit, and then
select Shutdown.
h. Reboot the system. If the system has a Trusted Platform Module (TPM) and/or fingerprint reader,
one or two prompts will appear, one to clear the TPM and the other to Reset Fingerprint Sensor;
press or tap F1 to accept or F2 to reject.
i. Remove all power and system batteries for at least 24 hours.
2. Complete one of the following:
● Remove and retain the storage drive.
– or –
● Clear the drive contents by using a third party utility designed to erase data from an SSD.
– or –
● Clear the contents of the drive by using the following BIOS Setup Secure Erase command option
steps:
IMPORTANT: If you clear data using Secure Erase, it cannot be recovered.
a. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the “Press the ESC key for Startup Menu”
“message is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
b. Select the Security menu and scroll down to the Utilities menu.
c. Select Hard Drive Tools.
d. Under Utilities, select Secure Erase, select the hard drive storing the data you want to clear, and
then follow the on-screen instructions to continue.
– or –
● Clear the contents of the drive by using the following Disk Sanitizer command steps:
IMPORTANT: If you clear data using Disk Sanitizer, it cannot be recovered.
126 Chapter 16 Statement of memory volatility
NOTE: The amount of time it takes for Disk Sanitizer to run can take several hours. Plug the computer
into an AC outlet before starting.
a. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the “Press the ESC key for Startup Menu”
“message is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
b. Select the Security menu and scroll down to the Utilities menu.
c. Select Hard Drive Tools.
d. Under Utilities, select Disk Sanitizer, select the hard drive storing the data you want to clear, and
then follow the on-screen instructions to continue.
127
Nonvolatile memory usage
Nonvolatile
Memory Type
Amount (Size) Does this
memory
store
customer
data?
Does this
memory
retain data
when power
is removed?
What is the
purpose of this
memory?
How is data input into this
memory?
How is this memory
write-protected?
HP Sure Start flash
(select models
only)
2 MBytes No Yes Provides
protected
backup of
critical System
BIOS code, EC
firmware, and
critical PC
configuration
data for select
platforms that
support HP
Sure Start.
For more
information,
see Using HP
Sure Start
(select models
only)
on page 131.
Data cannot be written to this
device via the host processor.
The content is managed
solely by the HP Sure Start
Embedded Controller.
This memory is protected
by the HP Sure Start
Embedded Controller.
Real Time Clock
(RTC) battery
backed-up CMOS
configuration
memory
256 Bytes No Yes Stores system
date and time
and noncritical
data.
RTC battery backed-up CMOS
is programmed using the
Computer Setup (BIOS), or
changing the Microsoft
Windows date & time.
This memory is not write-
protected.
Controller (NIC)
EEPROM
64 KBytes (not
customer
accessible)
No Yes Stores NIC
configuration
and NIC
firmware.
NIC EEPROM is programmed
using a utility from the NIC
vendor that can be run from
DOS.
A utility is required to
write data to this memory
and is available from the
NIC vendor. Writing data
to this ROM in an
inappropriate manner will
render the NIC non-
functional.
DIMM Serial
Presence Detect
(SPD)
configuration data
256 Bytes per
memory
module, 128
Bytes
programmable
(not customer
accessible)
No Yes Stores memory
module
information.
DIMM SPD is programmed by
the memory vendor.
Data cannot be written to
this memory when the
module is installed in a
PC. The specific write-
protection method varies
by memory vendor.
System BIOS 4 MBytes to 5
MBytes
Yes Yes Stores system
BIOS code and
PC
configuration
data.
System BIOS code is
programmed at the factory.
Code is updated when the
system BIOS is updated.
Configuration data and
settings are input using the
Computer Setup (BIOS) or a
custom utility.
NOTE: Writing data to
this ROM in an
inappropriate manner can
render the PC non-
functional.
A utility is required for
writing data to this
memory and is available
on the HP website; go to
http://www.hp.com/
support. Select Find your
product, and then follow
128 Chapter 16 Statement of memory volatility
Nonvolatile
Memory Type
Amount (Size) Does this
memory
store
customer
data?
Does this
memory
retain data
when power
is removed?
What is the
purpose of this
memory?
How is data input into this
memory?
How is this memory
write-protected?
the on-screen
instructions.
Intel Management
Engine Firmware
(present in only
specific ZBook and
EliteBook models.
For more
information, go to
http://www.hp.com/
support. Select
Find your
product, and then
follow the on-
screen
instructions.)
1.5 MBytes or 5
MBytes
Yes Yes Stores
Management
Engine Code,
Settings,
Provisioning
Data and iAMT
third-party data
store.
Management Engine Code is
programmed at the factory.
Code is updated via Intel
secure firmware update
utility. Unique Provisioning
Data can be entered at the
factory or by an
administrator using the
Management Engine (MEBx)
setup utility. The third party
data store contents can be
populated by a remote
management console or local
applications that have been
registered by an
administrator to have access
to the space.
The Intel chipset is
configured to enforce
hardware protection to
block all direct read/write
access to this area. An
Intel utility is required for
updating the firmware.
Only firmware updates
digitally signed by Intel
can be applied using this
utility.
Bluetooth flash 2 Mbit No Yes Stores
Bluetooth
configuration
and firmware.
Bluetooth flash is
programmed at the factory.
Tools for writing data to this
memory are not publicly
available but can be obtained
from the silicon vendor.
A utility is required for
writing data to this
memory and is made
available through newer
versions of the driver
whenever the flash
requires an upgrade.
802.11 WLAN
EEPROM
4 Kbit to 8 Kbit No Yes Stores
configuration
and calibration
data.
802.11 WLAN EEPROM is
programmed at the factory.
Tools for writing data to this
memory are not made public.
A utility is required for
writing data to this
memory and is typically
not made available to the
public unless a firmware
upgrade is necessary to
address a unique issue.
Web camera 64 Kbit No Yes Stores webcam
configuration
and firmware.
Webcam memory is
programmed using a utility
from the device
manufacturer that can be run
from Windows.
A utility is required for
writing data to this
memory and is typically
not made available to the
public unless a firmware
upgrade is necessary to
address a unique issue.
Fingerprint reader 512 KByte flash Yes Yes Stores
fingerprint
templates.
Fingerprint reader memory is
programmed by user
enrollment in HP
ProtectTools Security
Manager.
Only a digitally signed
application can make the
call to write to the flash.
Nonvolatile memory usage 129
Questions and answers
1. How can the BIOS settings be restored (returned to factory settings)?
IMPORTANT: Restore defaults does not securely erase any data on your hard drive. See question and
answer 6 for steps to securely erase data.
Restore defaults does not reset the Custom Secure Boot keys. See question and answer 7 for
information about resetting the keys.
a. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the “Press the ESC key for Startup Menu”
“message is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
b. Select Main, and then select Restore defaults.
c. Follow the on-screen instructions.
d. Select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
2. What is a UEFI BIOS, and how is it different from a legacy BIOS?
The Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) BIOS is an industry-standard software interface
between the platform firmware and an operating system (OS). It is a replacement for the older BIOS
architecture, but supports much of the legacy BIOS functionality.
Like the legacy BIOS, the UEFI BIOS provides an interface to display the system information and
configuration settings and to change the configuration of your computer before an OS is loaded. BIOS
provides a secure run-time environment that supports a Graphic User Interface (GUI). In this
environment, you can use either a pointing device (Touchscreen, TouchPad, pointing stick, or USB
mouse) or the keyboard to navigate and make menu and configuration selections. The UEFI BIOS also
contains basic system diagnostics.
The UEFI BIOS provides functionality beyond that of the legacy BIOS. In addition, the UEFI BIOS works to
initialize the computer’s hardware before loading and executing the OS; the run-time environment
allows the loading and execution of software programs from storage devices to provide more
functionality, such as advanced hardware diagnostics (with the ability to display more detailed system
information) and advanced firmware management and recovery software.
HP has provided options in Computer Setup (BIOS) to allow you to run in legacy BIOS, if required by the
operating system. Examples of this requirement would be if you upgrade or downgrade the OS.
3. Where does the UEFI BIOS reside?
The UEFI BIOS resides on a flash memory chip. A utility is required to write to the chip.
4. What kind of configuration data is stored on the DIMM Serial Presence Detect (SPD) memory
module? How would this data be written?
The DIMM SPD memory contains information about the memory module, such as size, serial number,
data width, speed/timing, voltage, and thermal information. This information is written by the module
manufacturer and stored on an EEPROM. This EEPROM cannot be written to when the memory module is
installed in a PC. Third-party tools do exist that can write to the EEPROM when the memory module is
not installed in a PC. Various third-party tools are available to read SPD memory.
5. What is meant by “Restore the nonvolatile memory found in Intel-based system boards”?
This message relates to clearing the Real Time Clock (RTC) CMOS memory that contains PC configuration
data.
6. How can the BIOS security be reset to factory defaults and data erased?
130 Chapter 16 Statement of memory volatility
IMPORTANT: Resetting will result in the loss of information.
These steps will not reset Custom Secure Boot Keys. See question and answer 7 for information about
resetting the keys.
a. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the “Press the ESC key for Startup Menu”
“message is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
b. Select Main, and then select Reset BIOS Security to Factory Default.
c. Follow the on-screen instructions.
d. Select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
7. How can the Custom Secure Boot Keys be reset?
Secure Boot is a feature to ensure that only authenticated code can start on a platform. If you enabled
Secure Boot and created Custom Secure Boot Keys, simply disabling Secure Boot will not clear the keys.
You must also select to clear the Custom Secure Boot Keys. Use the same Secure Boot access procedure
you used to create the Custom Secure Boot Keys, but make the selection to clear or delete all Secure
Boot Keys.
a. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the “Press the ESC key for Startup Menu”
“message is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
b. Select the Security menu, select Secure Boot Configuration, and then follow the on-screen
instructions.
c. At the Secure Boot Configuration window, select Secure Boot, select Clear Secure Boot Keys, and
then follow the on-screen instructions to continue.
Using HP Sure Start (select models only)
Select computer models are configured with HP Sure Start, a technology that continuously monitors your
computer's BIOS for attacks or corruption. If the BIOS becomes corrupted or is attacked, HP Sure Start
restores the BIOS to its previously safe state, without user intervention. Those select computer models ship
with HP Sure Start configured and enabled. HP Sure Start is configured and already enabled so that most
users can use the HP Sure Start default configuration. The default configuration can be customized by
advanced users.
To access the latest documentation on HP Sure Start, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Find your
product, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
Using HP Sure Start (select models only) 131
17 Recycling
When a non-rechargeable or rechargeable battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the
battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal.
HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable
batteries. For more information about recycling programs, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle.
132 Chapter 17 Recycling
Index
A
AC adapter, spare part numbers 31
Antenna Kit, spare part numbers 31
audio board
removal 78
spare part number 25, 78
spare part numbers 78
audio, product description 3
audio-out (headphone)/audio-in
(microphone) combo jack,
identifying 6
B
back cover
spare part number 28
Backup and Restore 116
backup tools 114
backups 105
creating 115
recovering 116
Base enclosure
removal 57
base enclosure
spare part number 25
battery
removal 38
spare part number 26
spare part numbers 38
battery light 18
bezel
spare part number 27
BIOS
determining version 90, 95, 100
downloading an update 90, 95,
100
updating 90, 95, 100
boot order
changing 109
buttons
left pointing stick 10
left TouchPad 10
optical drive eject 8
power 12
right pointing stick 10
right TouchPad 10
C
Cable Kit, spare part numbers 31
caps lock light, identifying 11
chipset, product description 1
components
bottom 17
display 9
front 17
left side 8
rear 19
right side 6
top 10
computer major components 21
Computer Setup
navigating and selecting 88, 93,
98
restoring factory settings 89,
94, 99
computer specifications 119
connector, power 7
D
Display assembly
spare part numbers 22, 23
display assembly
subcomponents 27
display assembly components
removal 82
spare part numbers 82
display bezel
removal 83
spare part numbers 82, 83
display cable, spare part number 28
display panel
product description 1
removal 83
spare part number 82
spare part numbers 83
docking
product description 4
docking port, identifying 7
docking station support holes,
identifying 17
drive light 18
Driver Recovery DVD,
creating 114
using for restore 117
Dual-Mode DisplayPort, identifying
6
E
embedded numeric keypad,
identifying 14
esc key, identifying 14, 15
Ethernet, product description 3
external monitor port 19
F
f11 recovery 112, 117
fan
spare part numbers 23
fan and heat sink assembly
spare part numbers 61
Ffan and heat sink assembly
removal 61
fingerprint reader
removal 72
spare part numbers 72
fingerprint reader, identifying 13
fn key, identifying 14, 15
G
graphics, product description 1
H
hard drive
product description 2
removal 39
spare part number 25, 30
spare part numbers 39
specifications 120
hard drive hardware kit
spare part number 30
hard drive recovery 112, 117
heat sink
spare part numbers 23
hinge
spare part number 27, 28
Index 133
hinge brackets
removal 85
hinge cover
removal 55
spare part numbers 55
Hinge Kit
spare part number 28
hot keys
microphone mute 16
using 15
HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI)
using 103
HP Recovery Disc Creator, using 114
HP Recovery Manager
correcting boot problems 109
starting 108
HP Recovery media
creating 105
recovery 108
HP Recovery partition
checking for presence 117
recovery 108
removing 110
using for recovery 117
HP Sure Start 131
I
integrated numeric keypad,
identifying 15
integrated webcam light,
identifying 9
internal microphones, identifying 9
J
jacks
audio-out (headphone)/audio-in
(microphone) combo 6
network 7
RJ-45 (network) 7
K
Keyboard
spare part numbers 23
keyboard
product description 4
remval 48
spare part numbers 48
keypad
embedded numeric 14
integrated numeric 15
keys
esc 14, 15
fn 14, 15
Windows application 14
Windows key 14, 15
L
labels
serial number 19
legacy support, USB 88, 93, 98
lights
battery 18
caps lock 11
drive 18
microphone mute 11
num lock 11
power 11, 17
RJ-45 (network) 7
webcam 9
wireless 11, 17
M
memory
nonvolatile 124
removal 51
spare part number 25
spare part numbers 51
volatile 124
memory card reader, identifying 7
memory module
product description 2
microphone
product description 3
microphone board
removal 86
microphone mute key, identifying
16
microphone mute light, identifying
11
minimized image recovery 108
minimized image, creating 107
model name 1
N
near field communication (NFC) cable
spare part number 76
near field communication (NFC)
module
spare part number 76
network jack, identifying 7
NFC
removal 76
spare part numbers 76
NFC antenna, identifying 9
NFC antennas, identifying 9
nonvolatile memory 124
num lock light 11
O
operating system, product
description 4
optical drive
product description 3
removal 46
spare part number 26
spare part numbers 30, 46
optical drive board
removal 64
spare part number 25
spare part numbers 64
optical drive eject button,
identifying 8
optical drive light, identifying 8
optical drive, identifying 8
optical drive/Blu-ray combo
spare part number 25, 30, 46,
51
optical drive/DVD combo
spare part number 30, 46
original system recovery 107
P
panel
spare part number 28
plastics kit, spare part numbers 31
pointing device, product
description 4
pointing stick 10
ports
Dual-Mode DisplayPort 6
external monitor 19
product description 3
serial 19
USB 3.0 charging (powered) 6
USB Type-C (charging) 7
power button board
removal 71
spare part number 23
spare part numbers 25, 71
power button, identifying 12
134 Index
power connector, identifying 7
power cord
set requirements 122
power lights 11, 17
power requirements, product
description 4
processor
product description 1
product description
audio 3
chipset 1
display panel 1
docking 4
Ethernet 3
external media cards 3
graphics 1
hard drive 2
keyboard 4
memory module 2
microphone 3
operating system 4
optical drive 3
pointing device 4
ports 3
power requirements 4
processors 1
product name 1
security 4
serviceability 5
solid-state drive 2
video 3
wireless 3
product name 1
product name and number,
computer 19
R
recover
options 107
recovery 113
discs 106, 108
HP Recovery Manager 107
media 108
starting 108
supported discs 106
system 107
USB flash drive 108
using HP Recovery media 106
recovery media
creating 105
creating using HP Recovery
Manager 106
recovery media, creating 114
recovery media, using for restore
117
recovery partition 112, 117
removing 110
recovery tools 114
recovery tools, Windows 116
recovery, system 116
refresh 113
regulatory information 19
removal/replacement
procedures 37, 54
removing personal data from volatile
system memory 124
reset 113
restoring the hard drive 112, 117
RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 7
RJ-45 (network) lights, identifying
7
RTC battery
removal 68
spare part number 23
spare part numbers 68
Rubber Kit, spare part number 31
S
Screw Kit, spare part numbers 31
security cable slot, identifying 8
security, product description 4
serial
removal 80
spare part number 80
spare part numbers 80
serial number 19
serial number, computer 19
serial port
spare part number 25
serial port, identifying 19
service door
removal 37
spare part number 26, 37
service door, spare part number 37
serviceability, product description 5
setup utility
navigating and selecting 88, 93,
98
restoring factory settings 89,
94, 99
SIM card slot, identifying 6
slots
security cable 8
smart card 8
smart card reader
removal 74
spare part numbers 74
smart card reader board
spare part number 23
smart card slot 8
solid-state drive
removal 41
spare part number 25, 29
spare part numbers 41
speaker
removal 70
spare part number 25
spare part numbers 70
Speaker Kit, spare part number 31
speakers, identifying 12
specifications
computer 119
hard drive 120
SSD
product description 2
Startup Repair, using 116
supported discs, recovery 106
Sure Start
using 92, 97, 102
system board
removal 59
spare part number 24
spare part numbers 59
system information
locating 19
system memory, removing personal
data from volatile 124
system recovery 107
system restore point
creating 106
system restore point, creating 105
Index 135
T
top cover
removal 65
spare part numbers 23, 65
TouchPad
buttons 10
removal 65
spare part number 23
spare part numbers 23, 65
TouchPad light, identifying 10
TouchPad zone
identifying 10
TPM settings 91, 96, 101
U
USB 3.0 charging (powered),
identifying 6
USB 3.0 port 7
USB legacy support 88, 93, 98
USB ports, identifying 7
USB Type-C (charging) port,
identifying 7
V
vents, identifying 8, 17
video, product description 3
W
warranty period 19
webcam 9
removal 86
webcam light, identifying 9
webcam, identifying 9
webcam/microphone module
removal 86
Windows
Refresh 113
Reset 113
system restore point 105, 106
Windows 7 operating system DVD
creating 114
using for restore 117
Windows 7 operating system media
creating 114
using for restore 117
Windows application key,
identifying 14
Windows key, identifying 14, 15
Windows operating system DVD
113
Windows Startup Repair, using 116
Windows tools
using 106
wireless antennas, identifying 9
wireless light 11, 17
wireless, product description 3
WLAN
removal 44
spare part numbers 44
WLAN antenna cables
removal 85
WLAN antennas, identifying 9
WLAN cable
spare part number 28
WLAN cable, spare part number 28
WLAN module
spare part number 25
WWAN
removal 42
spare part numbers 42
WWAN antenna cables
removal 86
WWAN antennas, identifying 9
WWAN cable
spare part number 28
WWAN module (select products only)
spare part number 25
136 Index

More Related Content

PPSX
1. peripheral and interface
DOCX
Laporan Pengerring gabang menggunakan DHT 11
PDF
B4X XUI
DOCX
Revisi 1
PPTX
Elektronika - Audio amplifier
PDF
Motorola FIRE XT Manual / User Guide
PDF
c06606758.pdf
PDF
HP Spectre 13t
1. peripheral and interface
Laporan Pengerring gabang menggunakan DHT 11
B4X XUI
Revisi 1
Elektronika - Audio amplifier
Motorola FIRE XT Manual / User Guide
c06606758.pdf
HP Spectre 13t

Similar to HP ProBook 655 G2 Service Manual / Guide (20)

PDF
c06523509 (HP Manual).pdf
PDF
HP Pavilion 13 x360 13.3-Inch Full-HD 2-in-1 Laptop
PDF
HP Micro Server remote access card user manual
PDF
Placa msi 7135
PDF
Dell Preicision 5680 Nhật Minh Laptop
PDF
Msi k9 n_series_manual
PDF
Manual HP 7300E MT I52400 4G 1TB W7 PRO 64B
PDF
Dell Precision 3530: Workstation giá rẻ hiệu năng cao
PDF
G6 io instruction manual
PDF
Jh0 manual(v1.0)
PDF
Dell Vostro 5481 Laptop dành cho học sinh sinh viên
PDF
Aoc usas-s4ir
PDF
Factory talk assetcentre installation guide
PDF
Dell G5 SE 5505
PDF
Manual asus gt440
PDF
Laptop Dell Latitude 5410: Laptop bền bỉ chuẩn Quân Đội
PDF
싸이퍼랩PDA CipherLab 9700 2D 3.5인치 윈도우즈PDA 산업용PDA 기업용 모바일컴퓨터 바코드PDA 매뉴얼
PDF
Manual Usuario TOSHIBA C850/C850D/L850/L850D
DOCX
Xtool HD900 Truck Diagnostic Tool User Manual
c06523509 (HP Manual).pdf
HP Pavilion 13 x360 13.3-Inch Full-HD 2-in-1 Laptop
HP Micro Server remote access card user manual
Placa msi 7135
Dell Preicision 5680 Nhật Minh Laptop
Msi k9 n_series_manual
Manual HP 7300E MT I52400 4G 1TB W7 PRO 64B
Dell Precision 3530: Workstation giá rẻ hiệu năng cao
G6 io instruction manual
Jh0 manual(v1.0)
Dell Vostro 5481 Laptop dành cho học sinh sinh viên
Aoc usas-s4ir
Factory talk assetcentre installation guide
Dell G5 SE 5505
Manual asus gt440
Laptop Dell Latitude 5410: Laptop bền bỉ chuẩn Quân Đội
싸이퍼랩PDA CipherLab 9700 2D 3.5인치 윈도우즈PDA 산업용PDA 기업용 모바일컴퓨터 바코드PDA 매뉴얼
Manual Usuario TOSHIBA C850/C850D/L850/L850D
Xtool HD900 Truck Diagnostic Tool User Manual
Ad

Recently uploaded (20)

PPTX
20250228 LYD VKU AI Blended-Learning.pptx
PDF
Review of recent advances in non-invasive hemoglobin estimation
PDF
Build a system with the filesystem maintained by OSTree @ COSCUP 2025
PDF
Building Integrated photovoltaic BIPV_UPV.pdf
PDF
Unlocking AI with Model Context Protocol (MCP)
PDF
Assigned Numbers - 2025 - Bluetooth® Document
PPTX
Spectroscopy.pptx food analysis technology
PDF
Encapsulation theory and applications.pdf
PDF
NewMind AI Weekly Chronicles - August'25-Week II
PPTX
Big Data Technologies - Introduction.pptx
PPTX
KOM of Painting work and Equipment Insulation REV00 update 25-dec.pptx
PDF
gpt5_lecture_notes_comprehensive_20250812015547.pdf
PPTX
VMware vSphere Foundation How to Sell Presentation-Ver1.4-2-14-2024.pptx
PDF
Encapsulation_ Review paper, used for researhc scholars
PPTX
MYSQL Presentation for SQL database connectivity
PDF
Electronic commerce courselecture one. Pdf
PDF
Network Security Unit 5.pdf for BCA BBA.
PDF
Empathic Computing: Creating Shared Understanding
PDF
Reach Out and Touch Someone: Haptics and Empathic Computing
PDF
cuic standard and advanced reporting.pdf
20250228 LYD VKU AI Blended-Learning.pptx
Review of recent advances in non-invasive hemoglobin estimation
Build a system with the filesystem maintained by OSTree @ COSCUP 2025
Building Integrated photovoltaic BIPV_UPV.pdf
Unlocking AI with Model Context Protocol (MCP)
Assigned Numbers - 2025 - Bluetooth® Document
Spectroscopy.pptx food analysis technology
Encapsulation theory and applications.pdf
NewMind AI Weekly Chronicles - August'25-Week II
Big Data Technologies - Introduction.pptx
KOM of Painting work and Equipment Insulation REV00 update 25-dec.pptx
gpt5_lecture_notes_comprehensive_20250812015547.pdf
VMware vSphere Foundation How to Sell Presentation-Ver1.4-2-14-2024.pptx
Encapsulation_ Review paper, used for researhc scholars
MYSQL Presentation for SQL database connectivity
Electronic commerce courselecture one. Pdf
Network Security Unit 5.pdf for BCA BBA.
Empathic Computing: Creating Shared Understanding
Reach Out and Touch Someone: Haptics and Empathic Computing
cuic standard and advanced reporting.pdf
Ad

HP ProBook 655 G2 Service Manual / Guide

  • 1. HP ProBook 640 G2 Notebook PC HP ProBook 645 G2 Notebook PC HP ProBook 650 G2 Notebook PC HP ProBook 655 G2 Notebook PC Maintenance and Service Guide
  • 2. © Copyright 2015 HP Development Company, L.P. AMD and AMD Litho Pro are trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. Intel, Skylake, and Core are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Product notice This guide describes features that are common to most models. Some features may not be available on your computer. Not all features are available in all editions of Windows 8. This computer may require upgraded and/or separately purchased hardware, drivers and/or software to take full advantage of Windows 8 functionality. See http://www.microsoft.com for details. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS Sound+ is a trademark of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved . First Edition: December 2015 Document Part Number: 839485-001
  • 3. Important Notice about Customer Self-Repair Parts CAUTION: Your computer includes Customer Self-Repair parts and parts that should only be accessed by an authorized service provider. See Chapter 5, "Removal and replacement procedures for Customer Self-Repair parts," for details. Accessing parts described in Chapter 6, "Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider only parts," can damage the computer or void your warranty. iii
  • 4. iv Important Notice about Customer Self-Repair Parts
  • 5. Safety warning notice WARNING! To reduce the possibility of heat-related injuries or of overheating the device, do not place the device directly on your lap or obstruct the device air vents. Use the device only on a hard, flat surface. Do not allow another hard surface, such as an adjoining optional printer, or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, to block airflow. Also, do not allow the AC adapter to contact the skin or a soft surface, such as pillows or rugs or clothing, during operation. The device and the AC adapter comply with the user-accessible surface temperature limits defined by the International Standard for Safety of Information Technology Equipment (IEC 60950-1). v
  • 7. Table of contents 1 Product description ....................................................................................................................................... 1 2 External component identification .................................................................................................................. 6 Right ....................................................................................................................................................................... 6 Left ......................................................................................................................................................................... 8 Display .................................................................................................................................................................... 9 Top ........................................................................................................................................................................ 10 TouchPad ........................................................................................................................................... 10 Lights ................................................................................................................................................. 11 Buttons, speakers, and fingerprint reader ........................................................................................ 12 Special function keys ........................................................................................................................ 14 Using the hot keys ............................................................................................................................. 15 Bottom ................................................................................................................................................................. 17 Front ..................................................................................................................................................................... 17 Rear ...................................................................................................................................................................... 19 Locating system information .............................................................................................................................. 19 3 Illustrated parts catalog .............................................................................................................................. 21 Computer major components .............................................................................................................................. 21 Display assembly subcomponents ...................................................................................................................... 27 Mass storage devices ........................................................................................................................................... 29 Miscellaneous parts ............................................................................................................................................. 31 4 Removal and replacement procedures preliminary requirements .................................................................... 32 Tools required ...................................................................................................................................................... 32 Service considerations ......................................................................................................................................... 32 Plastic parts ....................................................................................................................................... 32 Cables and connectors ...................................................................................................................... 33 Drive handling ................................................................................................................................... 33 Grounding guidelines ........................................................................................................................................... 34 Electrostatic discharge damage ........................................................................................................ 34 Packaging and transporting guidelines .......................................................................... 35 Workstation guidelines ................................................................................................... 35 Equipment guidelines ..................................................................................................... 36 vii
  • 8. 5 Removal and replacement procedures for Customer Self-Repair parts ............................................................. 37 Component replacement procedures .................................................................................................................. 37 Service door ....................................................................................................................................... 37 Battery ............................................................................................................................................... 38 Hard drive .......................................................................................................................................... 39 Solid-state drive (select products only) ............................................................................................ 41 WWAN module (select products only) ............................................................................................... 42 WLAN module .................................................................................................................................... 44 Optical drive ....................................................................................................................................... 46 Keyboard ........................................................................................................................................... 48 Memory .............................................................................................................................................. 51 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts ................................................... 54 Component replacement procedures .................................................................................................................. 54 Hinge cover ........................................................................................................................................ 55 Base enclosure .................................................................................................................................. 57 System board .................................................................................................................................... 59 Fan and heat sink assembly .............................................................................................................. 61 Optical drive board ............................................................................................................................ 64 Top cover and TouchPad .................................................................................................................... 65 RTC battery ........................................................................................................................................ 68 Speaker .............................................................................................................................................. 70 Power button board .......................................................................................................................... 71 Fingerprint reader (select products only) ......................................................................................... 72 Smart card reader .............................................................................................................................. 74 Near Field Communication module ................................................................................................... 76 Audio board ....................................................................................................................................... 78 Serial .................................................................................................................................................. 80 Display assembly ................................................................................................................................................. 82 7 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start in Windows 10 ........................................................................ 88 Using Computer Setup ......................................................................................................................................... 88 Starting Computer Setup .................................................................................................................. 88 Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup ................................................................................... 88 Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup ................................................................................. 89 Updating the BIOS ............................................................................................................................. 90 Determining the BIOS version ......................................................................................... 90 Downloading a BIOS update ........................................................................................... 90 Changing the boot order using the f9 prompt .................................................................................. 91 TPM BIOS settings (select products only) ........................................................................................................... 91 viii
  • 9. Using HP Sure Start (select products only) ......................................................................................................... 92 8 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start in Windows 8.1 ....................................................................... 93 Using Computer Setup ......................................................................................................................................... 93 Starting Computer Setup .................................................................................................................. 93 Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup ................................................................................... 93 Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup ................................................................................. 94 Updating the BIOS ............................................................................................................................. 95 Determining the BIOS version ......................................................................................... 95 Downloading a BIOS update ........................................................................................... 95 Changing the boot order using the f9 prompt .................................................................................. 96 TPM BIOS settings (select products only) ........................................................................................................... 96 Using HP Sure Start (select products only) ......................................................................................................... 97 9 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start in Windows 7 ......................................................................... 98 Using Computer Setup ......................................................................................................................................... 98 Starting Computer Setup .................................................................................................................. 98 Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup ................................................................................... 98 Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup ................................................................................. 99 Updating the BIOS ........................................................................................................................... 100 Determining the BIOS version ...................................................................................... 100 Downloading a BIOS update ......................................................................................... 100 Changing the boot order using the f9 prompt ................................................................................ 101 TPM BIOS settings (select products only) ......................................................................................................... 101 Using HP Sure Start (select products only) ....................................................................................................... 102 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) ................................................................................................... 103 Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device .................................................................. 103 11 Backup and recovery ................................................................................................................................ 105 Creating recovery media and backups .............................................................................................................. 105 Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) ....................................................................... 105 Using Windows tools ......................................................................................................................................... 106 Restore and recovery ......................................................................................................................................... 107 Recovering using HP Recovery Manager ........................................................................................ 107 What you need to know before you get started ........................................................... 107 Using the HP Recovery partition (select products only) .............................................. 108 Using HP Recovery media to recover ............................................................................ 108 Changing the computer boot order .............................................................................. 109 Removing the HP Recovery partition (select products only) ....................................... 110 ix
  • 10. 12 Backup and recovery in Windows 8.1 ......................................................................................................... 111 Backing up your information ............................................................................................................................. 111 Performing a system recovery .......................................................................................................................... 111 Using the Windows recovery tools .................................................................................................. 111 Using f11 recovery tools ................................................................................................................. 112 Using Windows operating system media (purchased separately) ................................................. 113 Using Windows Refresh or Windows Reset .................................................................................... 113 Using HP Software Setup ................................................................................................................ 113 13 Backup and recovery in Windows 7 ............................................................................................................ 114 Creating recovery media and backups .............................................................................................................. 114 Guidelines ........................................................................................................................................ 114 Creating recovery media with HP Recovery Disc Creator ............................................................... 114 Creating recovery media ............................................................................................... 115 Backing up your information .......................................................................................................... 115 Performing a system recovery .......................................................................................................................... 116 Using the Windows recovery tools .................................................................................................. 116 Using f11 recovery tools (select products only) ............................................................................. 117 Using Windows 7 operating system media ..................................................................................... 117 14 Specifications .......................................................................................................................................... 119 Computer specifications .................................................................................................................................... 119 Hard drive specifications ................................................................................................................................... 120 Solid-state drive specifications ......................................................................................................................... 120 15 Power cord set requirements .................................................................................................................... 122 Requirements for all countries .......................................................................................................................... 122 Requirements for specific countries and regions ............................................................................................. 122 16 Statement of memory volatility ................................................................................................................ 124 Nonvolatile memory usage ............................................................................................................................... 128 Questions and answers ..................................................................................................................................... 130 Using HP Sure Start (select models only) .......................................................................................................... 131 17 Recycling ................................................................................................................................................ 132 Index ........................................................................................................................................................... 133 x
  • 11. 1 Product description Category Description Product Name HP 640 G2 Notebook PC HP 645 G2 Notebook PC HP 650 G2 Notebook PC HP 655 G2 Notebook PC Processors HP 640 and HP 650 products: Intel Skylake Core i3-6100U Dual Core 2.3GHz SoC BGA Intel Skylake Core i5-6200U Dual Core 2.3/2.8GHz SoC BGA Intel Skylake Core i5-6300U Dual Core 2.4/3.0GHz SoC BGA Intel Skylake Core i7-6600U Dual Core 2.6/3.4GHz SoC BGA HP 645 and HP 655 products: AMD Carrizo APU BGA ULV A6-Pro-8500B with Radeon R5 Graphics A8-Pro-8600B with Radeon R6 Graphics A10-Pro-8700B with Radeon R6 Graphics Chipset Intel Skylake Chipset—The chipset is integrated with the processor (PCH- LP). AMD Carrizo—The chipset is integrated with the processor. Graphics Intel UMA Graphics (GT2) with shared video memory AMD (128-bit) w/2 GB GDDR5 (128Mb x 32, 1.35V, 5Gbps, Qty 4) AMD Integrated UMA graphics Panel Anti-glare panels for 14” products: 14.0" HD AG SVA 45% CG 220 nits eDP 1.2 flat (1366x768) 14.0" HD AG SVA 45% CG 220 nits eDP 1.2 flat (1366x768) with camera 14.0" HD AG SVA 45% CG 220 nits eDP 1.2 flat (1366x768) with WWAN 14.0" HD AG SVA 45% CG 220 nits eDP 1.2 flat (1366x768) with camera and with WWAN 14.0" FHD AG SVA 60% CG 300 nits eDP 1.3 + PSR slim flat (1920x1080) 14.0" FHD AG SVA 60% CG 300 nits eDP 1.3 + PSR slim flat (1920x1080) with camera 14.0" FHD AG SVA 60% CG 300 nits eDP 1.3 + PSR slim flat (1920x1080) with WWAN 14.0" FHD AG SVA 60% CG 300 nits eDP 1.3 + PSR slim flat(1920x1080) with camera and WWAN 1
  • 12. Category Description 14.0" FHD Slim eDP SVA 60% 300 nits (1920 x 1080) Touch with camera and with WWAN Anti-glare panels for 15" products with LED backlight: 15.6" HD AG SVA 45% CG 220 nits eDP 1.2 flat (1366x768) 15.6" HD AG SVA 45% CG 220 nits eDP 1.2 flat (1366x768) with camera 15.6" HD AG SVA 45% CG 220 nits eDP 1.2 flat (1366x768) with WWAN 15.6" HD AG SVA 45% CG 220 nits eDP 1.2 flat (1366x768) with camera and with WWAN 15.6" FHD AG SVA 60% CG 300 nits eDP 1.3 + PSR slim flat (1920x1080) 15.6" FHD AG SVA 60% CG 300 nits eDP 1.3 + PSR slim flat (1920x1080) with camera 15.6" FHD AG SVA 60% CG 300 nits eDP 1.3 + PSR slim flat (1920x1080) with WWAN 15.6" FHD AG SVA 60% CG 300 nits eDP 1.3 + PSR slim flat(1920x1080) with camera and WWAN 14.0" FHD Slim eDP SVA 60% 300 nits (1920 x 1080) Touch with camera and with WWAN Memory DDR4 PC4-17000 (2133) SODIMMS Memory Module—Supports Dual Channel Memory up to 16 GB. 4096 MB Total System Memory (4096 MB x 1) 8192 MB Total System Memory (4096 MB x 2) 8192 MB Total System Memory (8192 MB x 1) 12288 MB Total System Memory (8192 MB + 4096 MB) 16384 MB Total System Memory (8192 MB x 2) Hard drive Supports SATA3, 7mm, 2.5" HDDs: HDD 1TB 5400RPM 7mm SATA HDD 500GB 5400RPM 7mm Hybrid SATA 8GB NAND HDD 500GB 7200RPM 7mm FIPS SATA 8GB Opal2 HDD 500GB 7200RPM 7mm SATA HDD 500GB 7200RPM 7mm self-encrypting drive SATA Opal2 Solid-state drive SSD 128GB 2.5in SATA-3 TLC SSD 128GB 2280 M2 SATA-3 TLC SSD 180GB 2280 M2 SATA-3 SSD 180GB 2280 M2 SATA-3 self-encrypting drive Opal2 SSD 240GB 2280 M2 SATA-3 SSD 256GB 2.5in SATA-3 TLC SSD 256GB 2280 M2 PCIe-3x4 SS SSD 256GB 2280 M2 PCIe-3x4 SS NVMe SSD 256GB 2280 M2 SATA-3 self-encrypting drive Opal2 SSD 256GB 2280 M2 SATA-3 TLC 2 Chapter 1 Product description
  • 13. Category Description SSD 512GB 2280 M2 PCIe-3x4 DS SSD 512GB 2280 M2 PCIe-3x4 DS NVMe SSD 512GB 2280 M2 PCIe-3x4 SS NVMe SSD 512GB 2280 M2 SATA-3 self-encrypting drive Opal2 SSD 512GB 2280 M2 SATA-3 TLC Optical drive SATA-3 7 mm 2.5 fixed optical drives: DVD-ROM (defeatured combo) DVD+/-RW SuperMulti DL Blu-ray ROM DVD+/-RW SuperMulti DL Audio and video HD Audio with DTS Sound+ Microphone (Dual Array) only for products without a webcam Microphone (Dual Array) only for products with a webcam Camera (720p) Stereo Speakers (2) Ethernet Intel I219LM (Jacksonville-LM) 10/100/1000 Ethernet, with iAMT Intel I219V (Jacksonville-V) 10/100/1000 Ethernet, no iAMT Wireless LAN WLAN Broadcom Luffy 943228 abgn 2x2 + BT 4 LE PCIe+USB NGFF 2230 MOW Broadcom Nami 43142 bgn 1x1 + BT 4 LE PCIe+USB NGFF 1630 MOW WLAN Intel 8260NGW M Snowfield Peak ac 2x2 + BT 4.1 LE PCIe+USB NGFF 2230 WW WLAN Realtek Shanks RTL8188EE bgn 1x1 PCI-e NGFF 2230 M.2 WW (NB) WLAN 11AC 7265NV M.2 D0 MOW WLAN 11ac 2x2 INT 8260NGW SnfP2 WLAN 11ac INT 3165 M.2 MOW WLAN 11 ABGN+BT4 x 2.2 LUFFY INDO Wireless WAN (select products only) WWAN Foxconn Amstel LTE/EVDO/HSPA+ w/GPS M.2 WWAN T77W595 LTE M.2 w/GPS WWAN Huawei Wrangler MU736 HSPA+ w/GPS M.2 External media cards SD Media Reader slot supports SD, SDHC, and SDXC. Ports VGA (Dsub 15 pin) supporting 1920 x 1200 external resolution @ 60Hz Hot Plug / Unplug and auto detect DisplayPort 1.2 (1) USB Type C Charging Port (2) USB 3.0 Port (1 Charging) RJ-45 / Ethernet Docking connector 3
  • 14. Category Description Headphone / Microphone (Combo jack) AC Port (4.5mm) Docking Quest 2 dock support Keyboard/pointing devices HP Advanced Keyboard Touchpad, Spill-resistant with drain Touchpad, Spill-resistant with drain, DuraKeys and backlit Dual Point, Spill-resistant with drain, DuraKeys and backlit Power requirements Battery: 3-cell HP Long Life Prismatic 48 WHr ( 4.21 Ahr ) Battery AC adapter: 45 Watt Smart nPFC 3 pin RC 4.5mm connector - non slim 45 Watt Smart nPFC 3 pin RC 4.5mm connector - non slim 2 prong 65 Watt Smart nPFC 3 pin RC 4.5mm connector 65 Watt Smart nPFC EM 4.5mm connector 90 W PFC S-3P 4.5mm connector (select 15” products only) Power Cord (localized): 2-wire plug - 1m 3-wire plug - 1.8m 3-wire plug - 1m Security Supports Security Lock TPM 1.2 (Infineon; soldered down) Fingerprint Reader (select products only) Integrated Smart Card Reader (Active) Preboot Authentication (Password, Smart Card) Operating system Operating System Version: ● Windows 7: SP1 ● Windows 8.1: Update ● Windows 10: Threshold 2 Preinstalled: ● Win 7 Pro 32 ● Win 7 Pro 32 - MSNA ● Win 7 Pro 64 ● Win 8.1 CH 64 ( CPPP ) ● Win 8.1 Core for Higher Education ML 64 ● Win 8.1 EM 64 ● Win 8.1 EM 64 4 Chapter 1 Product description
  • 15. Category Description ● Win 8.1 64 High-End Emerging Markets ● Win 8.1 64 High-End Multi-Language ● Win 8.1 PRO 64 ● Win 10 Home 64 ● Win 10 Home 64 Single Language ● Win 10 Home 64 CPPP ● Win 10 Home 64 High-end ● Win 10 Home 64 High-end Single Language ● Win 10 Pro 64 ● Win 10 Pro 64 Downgrade Win 7 32 ● Win 10 Pro 64 Downgrade Win 7 64 ● FreeDOS 2.0 ● NeoKylin Linux 64 bit Serviceability End user replaceable parts: Memory Optical Drive Hard Drive Solid-state Drive Battery AC adapter Fan/Heat sink assembly Speaker WWAN (select products only) WLAN 5
  • 16. 2 External component identification Right Component Description (1) Dual-Mode DisplayPort Connects an optional digital display device, such as a high- performance monitor or projector. (2) USB 3.0 charging (powered) port Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. Standard USB ports will not charge all USB devices or will charge using a low current. Some USB devices require power and require you to use a powered port. NOTE: USB charging ports can also charge select models of cell phones and MP3 players, even when the computer is off. (3) SIM card slot (select products only) Supports a wireless subscriber identity module (SIM) card. (4) Audio-out (headphone)/Audio-in (microphone) combo jack Connects optional powered stereo speakers, headphones, earbuds, a headset, or a television audio cable. Also connects an optional headset microphone. This jack does not support optional microphone-only devices. 6 Chapter 2 External component identification
  • 17. Component Description WARNING! To reduce the risk of personal injury, adjust the volume before putting on headphones, earbuds, or a headset. For additional safety information, refer to the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices. To access this guide: 1. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. – or – Click the question mark icon in the taskbar. 2. Select My PC, select the Specifications tab, and then select User Guides. NOTE: When a device is connected to the jack, the computer speakers are disabled. (5) USB Type-C (charging) port Connects any USB device with a Type-C connector. NOTE: USB Type-C ports charge products such as cell phones, laptops, tablets, and MP3 players, even when the computer is off. Also, some USB Type-C ports connect DisplayPort, VGA, HDMI and other video devices to provide video output. NOTE: Adapters (purchased separately) may be required. (6) Memory card reader Reads optional memory cards that store, manage, share, or access information. (7) USB 3.0 port Connects an optional USB device, such as a keyboard, mouse, external drive, printer, scanner or USB hub. (8) RJ-45 (network) jack/status lights Connects a network cable. ● Green (left): The network is connected. ● Amber (right): Activity is occurring on the network. (9) Docking port Connects an optional docking device. (10) Power connector Connects an AC adapter. Right 7
  • 18. Left NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component Description (1) Security cable slot Attaches an optional security cable to the computer. NOTE: The security cable is designed to act as a deterrent, but it may not prevent the computer from being mishandled or stolen. (2) Vent Enables airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. (3) Optical drive (select products only) Depending on your computer model, reads an optical disc or reads and writes to an optical disc. (4) Optical drive light Green: The optical drive is in use. Off: The optical drive is off. (5) Optical drive eject button Releases the optical drive disc tray. (6) Smart card reader Supports optional smart cards. 8 Chapter 2 External component identification
  • 19. Display Component Description (1) WLAN antennas* Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless local area networks (WLANs). (2) WWAN antennas* Send and receive wireless signals to communicate with wireless wide area networks (WWANs). (3) Internal microphones Record sound. (4) Webcam light On: The webcam is in use. (5) Webcam (select products only) Records video and captures photographs. Some models allow you to video conference and chat online using streaming video. To use the webcam: ▲ Type camera in the taskbar search box, and then select Camera. (6) Near Field Communication (NFC) tapping area* (select products only) Tap another NFC-enabled device to the NFC tapping area to transfer files. *The antennas are not visible from the outside of the computer. For optimal transmission, keep the areas immediately around the antennas free from obstructions. For wireless regulatory notices, see the section of the Regulatory, Safety, and Environmental Notices that applies to your country or region. To access this guide: 1. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. – or – Click the question mark icon in the taskbar. Display 9
  • 20. Component Description 2. Select My PC, select the Specifications tab, and then select User Guides. Top TouchPad Component Description (1) Pointing stick (select products only) Moves the pointer and selects or activates items on the screen. (2) Left pointing stick button (select products only) Functions like the left button on an external mouse. (3) TouchPad light ● On: The TouchPad is off. ● Off: The TouchPad is on. (4) TouchPad zone Reads your finger gestures to move the pointer or activate items on the screen. (5) Left TouchPad button Functions like the left button on an external mouse. (6) Right pointing stick button (select products only) Functions like the right button on an external mouse. (7) Right TouchPad button Functions like the right button on an external mouse. 10 Chapter 2 External component identification
  • 21. Lights Component Description (1) Power light ● On: The computer is on. ● Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state, a power-saving state. The computer shuts off power to the display and other unneeded components. ● Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Hibernation is a power-saving state that uses the least amount of power. (2) Microphone mute light ● Amber: microphone sound is off. ● Off: microphone sound is on. (3) Num lock light On: Num lock is on. (4) Wireless light On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. NOTE: On some models, the wireless light is amber when all wireless devices are off. (5) Mute light ● Amber: Computer sound is off. ● Off: Computer sound is on. (6) Caps lock light On: Caps lock is on, which switches the key input to all capital letters. Top 11
  • 22. Buttons, speakers, and fingerprint reader Component Description (1) Power button ● When the computer is off, press the button to turn on the computer. ● When the computer is on, press the button briefly to initiate Sleep. ● When the computer is in the Sleep state, press the button briefly to exit Sleep. ● When the computer is in Hibernation, press the button briefly to exit Hibernation. CAUTION: Pressing and holding down the power button results in the loss of unsaved information. If the computer has stopped responding and shutdown procedures are ineffective, press and hold the power button for at least 5 seconds to turn off the computer. To learn more about your power settings, see your power options. ▲ Type power in the taskbar search box, and then select Power and sleep settings. – or – Right-click the Start button, and then select Power Options. (2) Speakers Produce sound. (3) Wireless button Turns the wireless feature on or off but does not establish a wireless connection. 12 Chapter 2 External component identification
  • 23. Component Description A wireless network must be set up before a wireless connection is possible. (4) Volume mute button (select products only) Mutes and restores speaker sound. (5) Fingerprint reader (select products only) Allows a fingerprint logon to Windows, instead of a password logon. Top 13
  • 24. Special function keys NOTE: Refer to the illustration that most closely matches your computer. Component Description (1) esc key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. (2) fn key Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key, the num lock key, the esc key, or the fn+b. See Using the hot keys on page 15 (3) Windows key Opens the Start menu. NOTE: Pressing the Windows key again will close the Start menu. (4) Embedded numeric keypad A numeric keypad superimposed over the keyboard alphabet keys that enables you to add, subtract, and perform other numeric tasks. When num lock is on, the keypad can be used like an external numeric keypad. (5) Windows application key Displays options for a selected object. (6) num lock key Turns the embedded numeric keypad on and off. 14 Chapter 2 External component identification
  • 25. Component Description (1) esc key Displays system information when pressed in combination with the fn key. (2) fn key Executes frequently used system functions when pressed in combination with a function key, the num lock key, the esc key, or the fn+b. See Using the hot keys on page 15 (3) Windows key Opens the Start menu. NOTE: Pressing the Windows key again will close the Start menu. (4) num lock key Turns the embedded numeric keypad on and off. (5) Integrated numeric keypad A separate keypad to the right of the alphabet keyboard that enables you to add, subtract, and perform other numeric tasks. When num lock is on, the integrated keypad can be used like an external numeric keypad. Using the hot keys To use a hot key: ▲ Press the fn key, and then press the correct function key represented by the icons below. Press fn+function key Description Initiates Sleep, which saves your information in system memory. The display and other system components turn off and power is conserved. To exit Sleep, briefly press the power button. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of information loss, save your work before initiating Sleep. Turns the keyboard backlight off or on. NOTE: To conserve battery power, turn off this feature. Top 15
  • 26. Press fn+function key Description Decreases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Increases the screen brightness incrementally as long as you hold down the key. Decreases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. Increases speaker volume incrementally while you hold down the key. Mutes the microphone. 16 Chapter 2 External component identification
  • 27. Bottom Component Description (1) Docking station support holes Support an optional docking station. (2) Vent Enables airflow to cool internal components. NOTE: The computer fan starts up automatically to cool internal components and prevent overheating. It is normal for the internal fan to cycle on and off during routine operation. Front Component Description (1) Wireless light On: An integrated wireless device, such as a wireless local area network (WLAN) device and/or a Bluetooth device, is on. NOTE: On some models, the wireless light is amber when all wireless devices are off. (2) Power light ● On: The computer is on. Bottom 17
  • 28. Component Description ● Blinking: The computer is in the Sleep state, a power- saving state. The computer shuts off power to the display and other unneeded components. ● Off: The computer is off or in Hibernation. Hibernation is a power-saving state that uses the least amount of power. (3) Battery light When AC power is connected: ● White: The battery charge is greater than 90 percent. ● Amber: The battery charge is from 0 to 90 percent. ● Off: The battery is not charging. When AC power is disconnected (battery not charging): ● Blinking amber: The battery has reached a low battery level. When the battery has reached a critical battery level, the battery light begins blinking rapidly. ● Off: The battery is not charging. (4) Drive light ● Blinking white: The hard drive is being accessed. ● Amber: HP 3D DriveGuard has temporarily parked the hard drive. 18 Chapter 2 External component identification
  • 29. Rear Component Description (1) External monitor port Connects an external VGA monitor or projector. (2) Serial port (select products only) Connects an optional device such as a serial modem, mouse, or printer. Locating system information Important system information is located on the bottom edge of the tablet or on the keyboard base. You may need the information when travelling internationally or when you contact support: (1): Serial number (2): Product number (3): Model number (4): Warranty period Rear 19
  • 30. Using Windows, briefly press the fn+esc key combination to display the System Information screen, which provides the product name and serial number of your computer, as well as information about the memory, processor, BIOS, and keyboard. 20 Chapter 2 External component identification
  • 31. 3 Illustrated parts catalog Computer major components NOTE: HP continually improves and changes product parts. For complete and current information on supported parts for your computer, go to http://partsurfer.hp.com, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE: Details about your computer, including model, serial number, product key, and length of warranty, are on the service tag at the bottom of your computer. See Locating system information on page 19 for details. Computer major components 21
  • 32. Item Component Spare part number (1) Display NOTE: For spare part information, see Display assembly subcomponents on page 27. 22 Chapter 3 Illustrated parts catalog
  • 33. Item Component Spare part number (2) Hinge covers For 14” products 840685-001 For 14” products with a touch screen 840686-001 For 15” products 840738-001 For 15” products with a touch screen 840739-001 (3) Keyboard NOTE: For a detailed list of country codes, see Keyboard on page 48. Keyboard for 14” products (includes keyboard cable) 840791-001 Backlit keyboard for 14” products (includes keyboard cable and backlight cable) 840800-001 840801-001 Keyboard for 15” products (includes keyboard cable) 841136-001 Backlit keyboard for 15” products ( includes keyboard cable and backlight cable) 841137-001 841145-001 (4) Top cover (includes TouchPad, bracket, and pointing stick (select products only)) Top cover for 14" products with a TouchPad 840719-001 Top cover for 14" products with a TouchPad and pointing stick 840720-001 Top cover for 14" products with a TouchPad, TouchPad on/off button, and TouchPad bracket 840721-001 Top cover for 14" products with a TouchPad, pointing stick, TouchPad on/off button, and bracket 845170-001 Top cover for 15" products with a TouchPad 840751-001 Top cover for 15" products with a TouchPad and pointing stick 840752-001 Top cover for 15" products with a TouchPad, TouchPad on/off button, and bracket 840753-001 Top cover for 15" products with a TouchPad, pointing stick, TouchPad on/off button, and bracket 845172-001 (5) Power button board (includes cable) For 15" products 840693-001 For 15" products 840744-001 (6) Smart card reader metal shield (included with Smart card reader) (7) Smart card reader (includes metal shield) 840694-001 (8) RTC battery ( includes cable) 651948-001 (9) TouchPad bracket (included with spare part numbers 840721-001, 840753-001, 845170-001, and 845172-001) (10) Fan (includes heat sink) (11) For 14" products with integrated graphics 840662-001 For 15" products with integrated graphics 840732-001 Computer major components 23
  • 34. Item Component Spare part number (12) For 15" products with high-quality integrated graphics 840734-001 For 14" products with discrete graphics 840663-001 For 15" products with discrete graphics 840733-001 (13) System board Discrete memory, Intel i5-6300U processor, and WWAN capability 840712-001 Discrete memory, Intel i5-6300U processor, WWAN capability, and Windows 840712-601 Discrete memory, Intel i7-6300U processor, and WWAN capability 840713-001 Discrete memory, Intel i7-6300U processor, WWAN capability, and Windows 840713-601 UMA memory, AMD A10-8700B processor, and WWAN capability 841494-001 842345-001 UMA memory, AMD A6-8500B processor 841495-001 842346-001 UMA memory, AMD A6-8500B processor, and Windows 841495-601 842346-601 UMA memory, AMD A8-8600B processor, and Windows 841497-001 842348-001 UMA memory, AMD A8-8600B processor, and Windows 841497-601 842348-601 UMA memory, AMD A8-8600B processor, and WWAN capability 841496-001 842347-001 UMA memory, AMD A8-8600B processor, and WWAN capability 841496-001 842347-001 UMA memory, Intel i3-6100U processor 840714-001 UMA memory, Intel i3-6100U processor and Windows 840714-601 UMA memory, Intel i5-6200U processor 840715-001 UMA memory, Intel i5-6200U processor and Windows 840715-601 UMA memory, Intel i5-6200U processor, and WWAN capability 840716-001 UMA memory, Intel i5-6200U processor, WWAN capability, and Windows 840716-601 UMA memory, Intel i5-6300U processor, and WWAN capability 840717-001 UMA memory, Intel i5-6300U processor, and WWAN capability, and Windows 840717-601 UMA memory, Intel i5-6440HQ processor, and WWAN capability 844345-001 UMA memory, Intel i5-6440HQ processor, and WWAN capability, and Windows 844345-601 UMA memory, Intel i7-6600U processor, and WWAN capability 840718-001 UMA memory, Intel i7-6600U processor, and WWAN capability, and Windows 840718-601 24 Chapter 3 Illustrated parts catalog
  • 35. Item Component Spare part number UMA memory, Intel i7-6820HQ processor, and WWAN capability 844346-001 UMA memory, Intel i7-6820HQ processor, and WWAN capability, and Windows 844346-601 (14) Fingerprint reader board (includes cable) For 14" products 840664-001 For 15" products 840735-001 (15) Optical drive board (includes cable) (16) Speaker (includes cable) 840700-001 (17) Audio board (includes cable) 840692-001 (18) Base enclosure For 14" products 840657-001 For 15" products 840725-001 (19) Solid-state drive NOTE: For spare part information, see Mass storage devices on page 29. (20) Serial port (includes cable) (select products only) 840746-001 (21) Hard drive NOTE: For spare part information, see Mass storage devices on page 29. (22) Memory 2GB PC3L 12800 1600MHz shared memory 691739-001 4GB PC3L 12800 1600MHz shared memory 691740-001 8GB PC3L 12800 1600MHz shared memory 693374-001 4GB 2133MHz 1.2v DDR4 shared memory 820569-001 8GB 2133MHz 1.2v DDR4 shared memory 820570-001 (23) WLAN module Broadcom Nami 43142 bgn 1x1 + BT 4 LE PCIe+USB NGFF 1630 MOW 792608-001 Realtek Shanks RTL8188EE bgn 1x1 PCI-e NGFF 2230 M.2 WW (NB) 792609-001 11AC 7265NV M.2 D0 MOW 793840-001 11ac 2x2 Intel 8260NGW Snowfield Peak 2 806721-001 11ac Intel 3165 M.2 MOW 806723-001 11 ABGN+BT4 x 2.2 LUFFY INDO 812132-001 Broadcom Luffy 943228 abgn 2x2 + BT 4 LE PCIe+USB NGFF 2230 MOW 797884-001 (24) WWAN module (select products only) NOTE: For spare part information, see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42. Foxconn Amstel LTE/EVDO/HSPA+ w/GPS M.2 822828-001 T77W595 LTE M.2 w/GPS 800870-001 Computer major components 25
  • 36. Item Component Spare part number Huawei Wrangler MU736 HSPA+ w/GPS M.2 793516-001 (25) Battery 801554-001 (26) Optical drive NOTE: For spare part information, see Mass storage devices on page 29. (27) Service door For 14" products 845169-001 For 15" products 845171-001 26 Chapter 3 Illustrated parts catalog
  • 37. Display assembly subcomponents Item Component Spare part number (1) Bezel For 14" HP 640 products 840658-001 For 15" HP 650 products 840726-001 For 14" HP 645 products 841482-001 For 15" HP 655 products 842333-001 (2) Hinge cover Hinge cover for 14" products 840685-001 Hinge cover for 15" products 840738-001 Display assembly subcomponents 27
  • 38. Item Component Spare part number (3) Hinge cover Hinge cover for 14" products with a touch screen 840686-001 Hinge cover for 15" products with a touch screen 845835-001 (4) Panel Slim panel for 14" products 840697-001 Flat panel for 14" products 840698-001 Touch screen for 14" products (includes camera) 840687-001 Slim panel for 15" products 840748-001 Flat panel for 15" products 840749-001 Touch screen for 15" products (includes camera) 840740-001 (5) Hinge Kit NOTE: For spare part information, see Mass storage devices on page 29. (6) WLAN cable, included in Cable Kit Cable Kit for 14" products 840659-001 Cable Kit for 15" products 840727-001 (7) WWAN cable, included in Cable Kit 840727-001 Cable Kit for 14" products 840659-001 Cable Kit for 15" products 840727-001 (8) Display cable For 14" products 840660-001 For 14" products with a touch screen 845829-001 For 15" products 840728-001 For 15" products with a touch screen 845834-001 (9) Back cover For 14" products 840656-001 For 14" products with a touch screen 845828-001 For 15" products 840724-001 For 15" products with a touch screen 845833-001 28 Chapter 3 Illustrated parts catalog
  • 39. Mass storage devices Item Component Spare part number (1) Solid-state drive 128GB M2 SATA-3 TLC 840701-001 841485-001 842336-001 128GB SATA-3 TLC for use in Brazil 840708-001 180GB M2 SATA-3 MLC 840702-001 841486-001 842337-001 180GB M2 SATA-3 self-encrypting Opal2 841487-001 842338-001 180GB M2 SATA-3 self-encrypting OPAL2 MLC 840703-001 SSD 240GB 2280 M2 SATA-3 843145-001 256GB M2 SATA-3 TLC 840704-001 841489-001 842340-001 256GB SATA-3 TLC for use in Brazil 840709-001 Mass storage devices 29
  • 40. Item Component Spare part number 256GB M2 SATA-3 self-encrypting OPAL2 MLC 840705-001 842341-001 841490-001 256GB M2 PCIe-3x4 NVMe 840710-001 256GB PCIe-3x4 NVMe 841488-001 842339-001 512GB M2 SATA-3 TLC 840706-001 841492-001 842343-001 512GB M2 SATA-3 self-encrypting OPAL2 MLC 840707-001 841493-001 842344-001 512GB M2 PCIe-3x4 NVMe 840711-001 841491-001 842342-001 (2) Hard Drive Hardware Kit 840682-001 (3) Hard drive 500GB 7200RPM RAW 7mm 703267-001 500GB 5400RPM SATA RAW HYB8G 7mm 732000-001 1TB 5400RPM RAW 7mm 762990-001 500GB 7200RPM SATA FIPS RAW 7mm 820572-001 500GB 7200RPM SATA self-encrypting RAW 7mm 820573-001 (4) Optical drive (select products only) Optical drive/Blu-ray combo for 14" products 840688-001 Optical drive/DVD ROM combo for 14" products 840689-001 840690-001 Optical drive/Blu-ray combo for 15" products 840741-001 Optical drive/DVD combo for 15" products 840742-001 Optical drive/DVD ROM combo for 15" products 840743-001 For products with an optical drive 840745-001 For products with an optical drive and a serial port (select products only) 840746-001 30 Chapter 3 Illustrated parts catalog
  • 41. Miscellaneous parts Component Spare part number AC adapter 90 W PFC ADPTR S-3P 4.5MM (select 15" products only) 710413-001 65 W AC adapter nPFC S-3P 4.5MM 710412-001 65 W AC adapter nPFC SMART 4.5mm EM 714657-001 45 W AC adapter NPFC SMART RC 4.5mm NSLIM 741727-001 45 W AC adapter NPFC SMART RC 4.5mm 2P 742436-001 Antenna Kit For 14" products 840655-001 For 15" products 840723-001 Bracket Kit (includes fingerprint reader bracket, WLAN module bracket, and smart card reader bracket for 14" products) 840683-001 Cable Kit For 14" products 840659-001 For 15" products 840728-001 Plastics Kit For 14" products 840696-001 For 15" products 840747-001 Rubber Kit 828884-001 Screw Kit For 14" products 840699-001 For 15" products 840750-001 Speaker Kit 840700-001 Miscellaneous parts 31
  • 42. 4 Removal and replacement procedures preliminary requirements Tools required You will need the following tools to complete the removal and replacement procedures: ● Flat-bladed screwdriver ● Magnetic screwdriver ● Phillips P0 and P1 screwdrivers Service considerations The following sections include some of the considerations that you must keep in mind during disassembly and assembly procedures. NOTE: As you remove each subassembly from the computer, place the subassembly (and all accompanying screws) away from the work area to prevent damage. Plastic parts CAUTION: Using excessive force during disassembly and reassembly can damage plastic parts. Use care when handling the plastic 32 Chapter 4 Removal and replacement procedures preliminary requirements
  • 43. Cables and connectors CAUTION: When servicing the computer, be sure that cables are placed in their proper locations during the reassembly process. Improper cable placement can damage the computer. Cables must be handled with extreme care to avoid damage. Apply only the tension required to unseat or seat the cables during removal and insertion. Handle cables by the connector whenever possible. In all cases, avoid bending, twisting, or tearing cables. Be sure that cables are routed in such a way that they cannot be caught or snagged by parts being removed or replaced. Handle flex cables with extreme care; these cables tear easily. Drive handling CAUTION: Drives are fragile components that must be handled with care. To prevent damage to the computer, damage to a drive, or loss of information, observe these precautions: Before removing or inserting a hard drive, shut down the computer. If you are unsure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. Before handling a drive, be sure that you are discharged of static electricity. While handling a drive, avoid touching the connector. Before removing a diskette drive or optical drive, be sure that a diskette or disc is not in the drive and be sure that the optical drive tray is closed. Handle drives on surfaces covered with at least one inch of shock-proof foam. Avoid dropping drives from any height onto any surface. Avoid exposing an internal hard drive to products that have magnetic fields, such as monitors or speakers. Avoid exposing an internal hard drive to products that have magnetic fields, such as monitors or speakers. Avoid exposing a drive to temperature extremes or liquids. If a drive must be mailed, place the drive in a bubble pack mailer or other suitable form of protective packaging and label the package “FRAGILE." Service considerations 33
  • 44. Grounding guidelines Electrostatic discharge damage Electronic components are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Circuitry design and structure determine the degree of sensitivity. Networks built into many integrated circuits provide some protection, but in many cases, ESD contains enough power to alter device parameters or melt silicon junctions. A discharge of static electricity from a finger or other conductor can destroy static-sensitive devices or microcircuitry. Even if the spark is neither felt nor heard, damage may have occurred. An electronic device exposed to ESD may not be affected at all and can work perfectly throughout a normal cycle. Or the device may function normally for a while, then degrade in the internal layers, reducing its life expectancy. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the computer when you are removing or installing internal components, observe these precautions: Keep components in their electrostatic-safe containers until you are ready to install them. Before touching an electronic component, discharge static electricity by using the guidelines described in this section. Avoid touching pins, leads, and circuitry. Handle electronic components as little as possible. If you remove a component, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. The following table shows how humidity affects the electrostatic voltage levels generated by different activities. CAUTION: A product can be degraded by as little as 700 V. Typical electrostatic voltage levels Relative humidity Event 10% 40% 55% Walking across carpet 35,000 V 15,000 V 7,500 V Walking across vinyl floor 12,000 V 5,000 V 3,000 V Motions of bench worker 6,000 V 800 V 400 V Removing DIPS from plastic tube 2,000 V 700 V 400 V Removing DIPS from vinyl tray 11,500 V 4,000 V 2,000 V Removing DIPS from Styrofoam 14,500 V 5,000 V 3,500 V Removing bubble pack from PCB 26,500 V 20,000 V 7,000 V Packing PCBs in foam-lined box 21,000 V 11,000 V 5,000 V 34 Chapter 4 Removal and replacement procedures preliminary requirements
  • 45. Packaging and transporting guidelines Follow these grounding guidelines when packaging and transporting equipment: ● To avoid hand contact, transport products in static-safe tubes, bags, or boxes. ● Protect ESD-sensitive parts and assemblies with conductive or approved containers or packaging. ● Keep ESD-sensitive parts in their containers until the parts arrive at static-free workstations. ● Place items on a grounded surface before removing items from their containers. ● Always be properly grounded when touching a component or assembly. ● Store reusable ESD-sensitive parts from assemblies in protective packaging or nonconductive foam. ● Use transporters and conveyors made of antistatic belts and roller bushings. Be sure that mechanized equipment used for moving materials is wired to ground and that proper materials are selected to avoid static charging. When grounding is not possible, use an ionizer to dissipate electric charges. Workstation guidelines Follow these grounding workstation guidelines: ● Cover the workstation with approved static-shielding material. ● Use a wrist strap connected to a properly grounded work surface and use properly grounded tools and equipment. ● Use conductive field service tools, such as cutters, screwdrivers, and vacuums. ● When fixtures must directly contact dissipative surfaces, use fixtures made only of static safe materials. ● Keep the work area free of nonconductive materials, such as ordinary plastic assembly aids and Styrofoam. ● Handle ESD-sensitive components, parts, and assemblies by the case or PCM laminate. Handle these items only at static-free workstations. ● Avoid contact with pins, leads, or circuitry. ● Turn off power and input signals before inserting or removing connectors or test equipment. Grounding guidelines 35
  • 46. Equipment guidelines Grounding equipment must include either a wrist strap or a foot strap at a grounded workstation. ● When seated, wear a wrist strap connected to a grounded system. Wrist straps are flexible straps with a minimum of one megohm 10% resistance in the ground cords. To provide proper ground, wear a strap snugly against the skin at all times. On grounded mats with banana-plug connectors, use alligator clips to connect a wrist strap. ● When standing, use foot straps and a grounded floor mat. Foot straps (heel, toe, or boot straps) can be used at standing workstations and are compatible with most types of shoes or boots. On conductive floors or dissipative floor mats, use foot straps on both feet with a minimum of one megohm resistance between the operator and ground. To be effective, the conductive must be worn in contact with the skin. The following grounding equipment is recommended to prevent electrostatic damage: ● Antistatic tape ● Antistatic smocks, aprons, and sleeve protectors ● Conductive bins and other assembly or soldering aids ● Nonconductive foam ● Conductive tabletop workstations with ground cords of one megohm resistance ● Static-dissipative tables or floor mats with hard ties to the ground ● Field service kits ● Static awareness labels ● Material-handling packages ● Nonconductive plastic bags, tubes, or boxes ● Metal tote boxes ● Electrostatic voltage levels and protective materials The following table lists the shielding protection provided by antistatic bags and floor mats. Material Use Voltage protection level Antistatic plastics Bags 1,500 V Carbon-loaded plastic Floor mats 7,500 V Metallized laminate Floor mats 5,000 V 36 Chapter 4 Removal and replacement procedures preliminary requirements
  • 47. 5 Removal and replacement procedures for Customer Self-Repair parts This chapter provides removal and replacement procedures for Customer Self-Repair parts. NOTE: The Customer Self-Repair program is not available in all locations. Installing a part not supported by the Customer Self-Repair program may void your warranty. Check your warranty to determine if Customer Self-Repair is supported in your location. Component replacement procedures NOTE: Details about your computer, including model, serial number, product key, and length of warranty, are on the service tag at the bottom of your computer. See Locating system information on page 19 for details. NOTE: HP continually improves and changes product parts. For complete and current information on supported parts for your computer, go to http://partsurfer.hp.com, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. There are as many as xx screws that must be removed, replaced, and/or loosened when servicing Customer Self-Repair parts. Make special note of each screw size and location during removal and replacement. Service door Description Spare part number Service door For 14" products 845169-001 For 15" products 845171-001 1. Turn off the computer. If you are unsure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 2. Disconnect the power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the computer. 3. Disconnect all external devices from the computer. Remove the service door: 1. Depending on the product, remove 8 (for 14 products) or 10 (for 15 products) M2.5x6L P1 screws (1). Component replacement procedures 37
  • 48. 2. Lift the service door to remove it (2). Battery Description Spare part number Battery 3C 48WHr 4.21Ah LI CI03048XL-PR 801554-001 IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal andreplacement Before removing the battery, follow these steps: 1. Shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to thecomputer. 3. Disconnect the power from the computer by first unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet and then unplugging the AC adapter from the computer. 4. Remove the service door (see Service door on page 37). Remove the battery: 1. Loosen 6 P1 captive screws (1). 38 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement procedures for Customer Self-Repair parts
  • 49. 2. Lift the battery (2), and remove it (3). Reverse this procedure to install the battery. Hard drive Description Spare part number Hard drive 500GB 7200RPM RAW 7mm 703267-001 500GB 5400RPM SATA RAW HYB8G 7mm 732000-001 1TB 5400RPM RAW 7mm 762990-001 500GB 7200RPM SATA FIPS RAW 7mm 820572-001 500GB 7200RPM SATA self-encrypting RAW 7mm 820573-001 HDD Hardware Kit 840682-001 IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and replacement Before removing the hard drive, follow these steps: 1. Shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 3. Disconnect the power from the computer by first unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet and then unplugging the AC adapter from the computer. 4. Remove the following components: a. Service door (see Service door on page 37). b. Battery (see Battery on page 38). Component replacement procedures 39
  • 50. Remove the hard drive: 1. Loosen 4 P1 captive screws or remove 4 M 2.0x8L P1 screws (1). 2. Pull the plastic tab (2), and then remove the hard drive (3). 3. If it is necessary to disassemble the hard drive, remove the 4 screws (1), and then remove pull the tab (2) to remove the cover from the hard drive. 40 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement procedures for Customer Self-Repair parts
  • 51. Reverse this procedure to reassemble and install the hard drive. Solid-state drive (select products only) Description Spare part number Solid-state drive 128GB M2 SATA-3 TLC 840701-001 841485-001 842336-001 128GB SATA-3 TLC for use in Brazil 840708-001 180GB M2 SATA-3 MLC 840702-001 841486-001 842337-001 180GB M2 SATA-3 self-encrypting Opal2 841487-001 842338-001 180GB M2 SATA-3 self-encrypting OPAL2 MLC 840703-001 SSD 240GB 2280 M2 SATA-3 843145-001 256GB M2 SATA-3 TLC 840704-001 841489-001 842340-001 256GB SATA-3 TLC for use in Brazil 840709-001 256GB M2 SATA-3 self-encrypting OPAL2 MLC 840705-001 842341-001 841490-001 256GB M2 PCIe-3x4 NVMe 840710-001 256GB PCIe-3x4 NVMe 841488-001 842339-001 512GB M2 SATA-3 TLC 840706-001 841492-001 842343-001 512GB M2 SATA-3 self-encrypting OPAL2 MLC 840707-001 841493-001 842344-001 512GB M2 PCIe-3x4 NVMe 840711-001 841491-001 842342-001 Component replacement procedures 41
  • 52. IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and replacement Before removing the solid-state drive, follow these steps: 1. Shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 3. Disconnect the power from the computer by first unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet and then unplugging the AC adapter from the computer. 4. Remove the following components: a. Service door (see Service door on page 37). b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38) c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39). Remove the solid-state drive: ▲ Remove 1 Phillips M2.0x8 screw (1), and then remove the solid-state drive (2). Reverse this procedure to install the solid-state drive. WWAN module (select products only) NOTE: The WWAN module spare part kit includes the cable. Description Spare part number WWAN module Foxconn Amstel LTE/EVDO/HSPA+ w/GPS M.2 822828-001 42 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement procedures for Customer Self-Repair parts
  • 53. Description Spare part number T77W595 LTE M.2 w/GPS 800870-001 Huawei Wrangler MU736 HSPA+ w/GPS M.2 793516-001 IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and replacement Before removing the WWAN module, follow these steps: 1. Shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 3. Disconnect the power from the computer by first unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet and then unplugging the AC adapter from the computer. 4. Remove the following components: a. Service door (see Service door on page 37). b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38) c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39). d. Solid state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41). Remove the WWAN module: 1. Disconnect the two cables (1). Component replacement procedures 43
  • 54. 2. Remove 1 M 2.0x 3L P1screw (2), and then remove the WWAN module. Reverse this procedure to install the WWAN module. WLAN module NOTE: The WLAN module spare part kit includes the cable. Description Spare part number WLAN Broadcom Nami 43142 bgn 1x1 + BT 4 LE PCIe+USB NGFF 1630 MOW 792608-001 Realtek Shanks RTL8188EE bgn 1x1 PCI-e NGFF 2230 M.2 WW (NB) 792609-001 11AC 7265NV M.2 D0 MOW 793840-001 11ac 2x2 Intel 8260NGW Snowfield Peak 2 806721-001 11ac Intel 3165 M.2 MOW 806723-001 11 ABGN+BT4 x 2.2 LUFFY INDO 812132-001 Broadcom Luffy 943228 abgn 2x2 + BT 4 LE PCIe+USB NGFF 2230 MOW 797884-001 IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and replacement Before removing the WLAN, follow these steps: 44 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement procedures for Customer Self-Repair parts
  • 55. 1. Shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 3. Disconnect the power from the computer by first unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet and then unplugging the AC adapter from the computer. 4. Remove the following components: a. Service door (see Service door on page 37). b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38) c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39). d. Solid state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41). e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42). Remove the WLAN module: 1. Disconnect the two cables (1). 2. Remove 1 M 2.0x3L P1 screw (2). 3. Remove the bracket (3), and then remove the WLAN module. Reverse this procedure to install the WLAN module. Component replacement procedures 45
  • 56. Optical drive Description Spare part number Optical drive Optical drive/Blu-ray combo for 14” products 840688-001 Optical drive/DVD combo for 14" products 840689-001 Optical drive/DVD ROM combo for 14" products 840690-001 Optical drive/Blu-ray combo for 15" products 840741-001 Optical drive/DVD combo for 15" products 840742-001 Optical drive/DVD ROM combo for 15" products 840743-001 IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and replacement Before removing the optical drive, follow these steps: 1. Shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 3. Disconnect the power from the computer by first unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet and then unplugging the AC adapter from the computer. 4. Remove the following components: a. Service door (see Service door on page 37). b. Battery (see Battery on page 38). c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39). d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41). e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42). f. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44). Remove the optical drive: 1. Remove 1 Phillips M2.0x8 screw (1). 46 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement procedures for Customer Self-Repair parts
  • 57. 2. Remove the optical drive (2). Reverse this procedure to install the optical drive. Component replacement procedures 47
  • 58. Keyboard In this section, the first table provides the main spare part number for the keyboard. The second table provides the country codes. Description Spare part number Keyboard for 14" products (includes keyboard cable) 840791-001 Backlit keyboard for 14" products (includes keyboard cable and backlight cable) 840800-001 840801-001 Keyboard for 15" products (includes keyboard cable) 841136-001 Backlit keyboard for 15" products ( includes keyboard cable and backlight cable) 841137-001 841145-001 For use in country or region Spare part number For use in country or region Spare part number For use in country or region Spare part number Belgium -A41 India -D61 Saudi Arabia -171 Brazil -201 Israel -BB1 Slovenia -BA1 Bulgaria -261 Italy -061 South Korea -AD1 Canada -DB1 Japan -291 Spain -071 Czech Republic and Slovakia -FL1 Latin America -161 Sweden and Finland -B71 Denmark -081 The Netherlands -B31 Switzerland -BG1 Denmark, Finland, and Norway -DH1 Northern Africa -FP1 Taiwan -AB1 France -051 Norway -091 Thailand -281 Germany -041 Portugal -131 Turkey -141 Greece -151 Romania -271 United Kingdom -031 Hungary -211 Russia -251 United States -001 Iceland -DD1 Before removing the keyboard, follow these steps: 1. Turn off the computer. If you are unsure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 2. Disconnect the power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the computer. 3. Disconnect all external devices from the computer. 4. Remove the following components: a. Service door (see Service door on page 37). b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38) 48 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement procedures for Customer Self-Repair parts
  • 59. c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39). d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41). e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42). f. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44). g. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46). Remove the keyboard: 1. Remove the 3 M 2x4L screws that secure the keyboard to the computer. 2. Position the computer open and on its side. Component replacement procedures 49
  • 60. 3. Gently insert a Torx screwdriver or other blunt tool into the keyboard release opening under the memory module, and then press gently on the back of the keyboard until the keyboard disengages from the computer. CAUTION: Press gently to avoid damaging the mylar on the back of the keyboard. 4. Rotate the keyboard downward (1) onto the top cover (1), and then release and disconnect the following connectors and cables: ● Release the keyboard connector (2) and then remove the cable (3). ● For products with a backlit keyboard, release the backlight connectors (4) and (6), and then remove the cables (5) and (7). 50 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement procedures for Customer Self-Repair parts
  • 61. 5. Remove the keyboard (8). Reverse this procedure to install the keyboard. Memory Description Spare part number Memory 2GB PC3L 12800 1600MHz shared memory 691739-001 4GB PC3L 12800 1600MHz shared memory 691740-001 8GB PC3L 12800 1600MHz shared memory 693374-001 4GB 2133MHz 1.2v DDR4 shared memory 820569-001 8GB 2133MHz 1.2v DDR4 shared memory 820570-001 IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and replacement Component replacement procedures 51
  • 62. Before removing the memory module, follow these steps: 1. Shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 3. Disconnect the power from the computer by first unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet and then unplugging the AC adapter from the computer. 4. Remove the following components: a. Service door (see Service door on page 37). b. Battery (see Battery on page 38). c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39). d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41). e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42). f. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44). g. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46). h. Keyboard (see Keyboard on page 48). ▲ If you are replacing a memory module, remove the existing memory module:. ▲ Pull away the retention clips (1) on each side of the memory module. The memory module tilts up. ▲ Grasp the edge of the memory module (2), and then gently pull the memory module out of the memory module slot. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the memory module. To protect a memory module after removal, place it in an electrostatic-safe container. To install a memory module: 52 Chapter 5 Removal and replacement procedures for Customer Self-Repair parts
  • 63. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, hold the memory module by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the memory module. 1. Align the notched edge (1) of the memory module with the tab in the memory module slot. 2. With the memory module at a 45-degree angle from the surface of the memory module compartment, press the module (2) into the memory module slot until it is seated. 3. Gently press the memory module down, applying pressure to both the left and right edges of the memory module, until the retention clips snap into place. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the memory module, be sure that you do not bend the memory module. Component replacement procedures 53
  • 64. 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts This chapter provides removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider only parts. CAUTION: Components described in this chapter should only be accessed by an authorized service provider. Accessing these parts can damage the computer or void the warranty. CAUTION: This computer does not have user-replaceable parts. Only HP authorized service providers should perform the removal and replacement procedures described here. Accessing the internal part could damage the computer or void the warranty. Component replacement procedures NOTE: Details about your computer, including model, serial number, product key, and length of warranty, are on the service tag at the bottom of your computer. See Locating system information on page 19 for details. NOTE: HP continually improves and changes product parts. For complete and current information on supported parts for your computer, go to http://partsurfer.hp.com, select your country or region, and then follow the on-screen instructions. There are as many as xx screws that must be removed, replaced, and/or loosened when servicing Authorized Service Provider only parts. Make special note of each screw size and location during removal and replacement. 54 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
  • 65. Hinge cover Description Spare part number Hinge Kit for 14" products 840684-001 Hinge Kit for 15" products 840737-001 Hinge Kit for 14" products with a touch screen 845830-001 Hinge Kit for 15" products with a touch screen 845835-001 Hinge cover for 14" products 840685-001 Hinge cover for 15" products 840738-001 Hinge cover for 14" products with a touch screen 840686-001 Hinge cover for 15" products with a touch screen 845835-001 IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and replacement Before removing the hinge covers, follow these steps: 1. Turn off the computer. If you are unsure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 2. Disconnect the power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the computer. 3. Disconnect all external devices from the computer. 4. Remove the following components: a. Service door (see Service door on page 37). b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38) c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39). d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41). e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42). f. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44). g. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46). h. Keyboard (see Keyboard on page 48). i. Memory (see Memory on page 51). Remove the hinge covers: ▲ Remove the 2 M2x5L P1 screws (1), and then remove the hinge covers (2). Component replacement procedures 55
  • 66. Reverse this procedure to replace the hinge covers. 56 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
  • 67. Base enclosure IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and replacement. Description Spare part number Base enclosure For 14" products 840712-001 For 15" products 840725-001 Before removing the base enclosure, follow these steps: 1. Shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 3. Disconnect the power from the computer by first unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet and then unplugging the AC adapter from the computer. 4. Remove the following components: a. Service door (see Service door on page 37). b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38) c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39). d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41). e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42). f. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44). g. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46). h. Keyboard (see Keyboard on page 48). i. Memory (see Memory on page 51). j. Hinge covers (see Hinge cover on page 55). Remove the base enclosure: 1. Disconnect the fingerprint reader cable (1), the speaker cable (2), the display cable (3), and the pointing stick cable (4). Component replacement procedures 57
  • 68. 2. Remove the two M2x3L screws (1), the wo M2x1.5L 1 P0 screws (2), 1 M2.5x8L T8 screw (3), and 10 M2.6x6L T8 screws (8). Reverse this procedure to install the base enclosure. 58 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
  • 69. System board Description Spare part number System board Discrete memory, Intel i5-6300U processor, and WWAN capability 840712-001 Discrete memory, Intel i5-6300U processor, WWAN capability, and Windows 840712-601 Discrete memory, Intel i7-6300U processor, and WWAN capability 840713-001 Discrete memory, Intel i7-6300U processor, WWAN capability, and Windows 840713-601 UMA memory, AMD A10-8700B processor, and WWAN capability 841494-001 842345-001 UMA memory, AMD A6-8500B processor 841495-001 842346-001 UMA memory, AMD A6-8500B processor, and Windows 841495-601 842346-601 UMA memory, AMD A8-8600B processor, and Windows 841497-001 842348-001 UMA memory, AMD A8-8600B processor, and Windows 841497-601 842348-601 UMA memory, AMD A8-8600B processor, and WWAN capability 841496-001 842347-001 UMA memory, AMD A8-8600B processor, and WWAN capability 841496-001 842347-001 UMA memory, Intel i3-6100U processor 840714-001 UMA memory, Intel i3-6100U processor and Windows 840714-601 UMA memory, Intel i5-6200U processor 840715-001 UMA memory, Intel i5-6200U processor and Windows 840715-601 UMA memory, Intel i5-6200U processor, and WWAN capability 840716-001 UMA memory, Intel i5-6200U processor, WWAN capability, and Windows 840716-601 UMA memory, Intel i5-6300U processor, and WWAN capability 840717-001 UMA memory, Intel i5-6300U processor, and WWAN capability, and Windows 840717-601 UMA memory, Intel i5-6440HQ processor, and WWAN capability 844345-001 UMA memory, Intel i5-6440HQ processor, and WWAN capability, and Windows 844345-601 UMA memory, Intel i7-6600U processor, and WWAN capability 840718-001 UMA memory, Intel i7-6600U processor, and WWAN capability, and Windows 840718-601 UMA memory, Intel i7-6820HQ processor, and WWAN capability 844346-001 UMA memory, Intel i7-6820HQ processor, and WWAN capability, and Windows 844346-601 Component replacement procedures 59
  • 70. IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and replacement Before removing the system board, follow these steps: 1. Shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 3. Disconnect the power from the computer by first unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet and then unplugging the AC adapter from the computer. 4. Remove the following components: a. Service door (see Service door on page 37). b. Battery (see Battery on page 38). c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39). d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41). e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42). f. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44). g. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46). h. Keyboard (see Keyboard on page 48). i. Hinge covers (see Hinge cover on page 55). j. Base enclosure (see Base enclosure on page 57). Remove the system board: 1. Disconnect the RTC battery cable (2) and the power button board cable (2). 2. Loosen 3 P1 captive screws (1) on the fan, remove 4 M2x3L P1 screws (2) from the system board, and remove 2 M2x3L screws from the ODD board (3). 60 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
  • 71. 3. Lift the system board (4), and then remove it (5). Reverse this procedure to install the system board. Fan and heat sink assembly Description Spare part number Fan and heat sink assembly For 14" products with integrated graphics 840662-001 For 14" products with discrete graphics 840663-001 For 15" products with integrated graphics 840732-001 For 15" products with high-quality integrated graphics 840734-001 For 15" products with discrete graphics 840733-001 IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and replacement Before removing the fan and heat sink, follow these steps: 1. Shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 3. Disconnect the power from the computer by first unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet and then unplugging the AC adapter from the computer. 4. Remove the following components: Component replacement procedures 61
  • 72. a. Service door (see Service door on page 37). b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38) c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39). d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41). e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42). f. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44). g. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46). h. Keyboard (see Keyboard on page 48). i. Hinge covers (see Hinge cover on page 55). j. Base enclosure (see Base enclosure on page 57). k. System board (see System board on page 59). To remove the fan and heat sink assembly for products with discrete graphics: 1. Disconnect the cable (1) from the system board. 2. Loosen 6 Phillips captive screws (2). 3. Lift the fan and heat sink assembly (3) to remove it . To remove the fan and heat sink assembly for products with integrated graphics: 1. Disconnect the cable (1) from the system board. 2. Loosen 4 Phillips captive screws (2). 62 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
  • 73. 3. Lift the fan and heat sink assembly (3) to remove it. Reverse this procedure to install the fan and heat sink assembly. Component replacement procedures 63
  • 74. Optical drive board Description Spare part number Optical drive board For products with an optical drive 840745-001 For products with an optical drive and a serial port (select products only) 840746-001 IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and replacement Before removing the optical drive board, follow these steps: 1. Shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 3. Disconnect the power from the computer by first unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet and then unplugging the AC adapter from the computer. 4. Remove the following components: a. Service door (see Service door on page 37). b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38) c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39). d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41). e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42). f. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44). g. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46). h. Keyboard (see Keyboard on page 48). i. Hinge covers (see Hinge cover on page 55). j. Base enclosure (see Base enclosure on page 57). k. System board (see System board on page 59). l. Fan/heat sink assembly (see Fan and heat sink assembly on page 61). Remove the optical drive board: ▲ Disconnect the optical drive board cable (1), and then remove the optical drive board (2). 64 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
  • 75. Reverse this procedure to install the optical drive board. Top cover and TouchPad NOTE: The top cover spare part kit includes the TouchPad. Description Spare part number Top cover (includes TouchPad) Top cover for 14" products with a TouchPad 840719-001 Top cover for 14" products with a TouchPad 840720-001 Top cover for 14" products with a TouchPad, TouchPad on/off button, and bracket 840721-001 Top cover for 14" products with a TouchPad, TouchPad on/off button, and bracket 845170-001 Top cover for 15" products with a TouchPad 840751-001 Top cover for 15" products with a TouchPad and pointing stick 840752-001 Top cover for 15" products with a TouchPad, TouchPad on/off button, and bracket 840753-001 Top cover for 15" products with a TouchPad, TouchPad on/off button, pointing stick, and bracket 845172-001 IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and replacement Before removing the top cover, follow these steps: 1. Shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. Component replacement procedures 65
  • 76. 3. Disconnect the power from the computer by first unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet and then unplugging the AC adapter from the computer. 4. Remove the following components: a. Service door (see Service door on page 37). b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38) c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39). d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41). e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42). f. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44). g. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46). h. Keyboard (see Keyboard on page 48). i. Hinge covers (see Hinge cover on page 55). j. Base enclosure (see Base enclosure on page 57). k. System board (see System board on page 59). l. Fan/heat sink assembly (see Fan and heat sink assembly on page 61). Remove the top cover: 1. If the computer is equipped with a pointing stick (select products only), remove 2 M2x1.5L P0 pointing stick screws. 66 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
  • 77. 2. Turn the computer over, and then disconnect the power button board cable (1), the speaker cable (2), and the fingerprint reader board cable (3). 3. Carefully disconnect the plastic clips (1) on the front edge, and then remove the top cover (1). Reverse this procedure to install the top cover. To remove the TouchPad: 1. Disconnect the TouchPad cables (1) and (2). Component replacement procedures 67
  • 78. 2. Remove 4 Phillips screws (1), and then lift the TouchPad bracket (2) to remove it. RTC battery Description Spare part number RTC battery 651948-001 68 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
  • 79. IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and replacement Before removing the RTC battery, follow these steps: 1. Shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 3. Remove the following components: a. Service door (see Service door on page 37). b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38) c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39). d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41). e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42). f. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44). g. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46). h. Keyboard (see Keyboard on page 48). i. Hinge covers (see Hinge cover on page 55). j. Base enclosure (see Base enclosure on page 57). k. System board (see System board on page 59). l. Fan/heat sink assembly (see Fan and heat sink assembly on page 61). m. Top cover (see Top cover and TouchPad on page 65). To remove the RTC battery: ▲ If not already disconnected, disconnect the cable, and then remove the RTC battery. Component replacement procedures 69
  • 80. Reverse this procedure to install the RTC battery. Speaker NOTE: The speaker spare part kit includes the speaker cable. Description Spare part number Speaker Kit 840700-001 IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and replacement Before removing the speaker, follow these steps: 1. Shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 3. Disconnect the power from the computer by first unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet and then unplugging the AC adapter from the computer. 4. Remove the following components: a. Service door (see Service door on page 37). b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38) c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39). d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41). e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42). f. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44). g. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46). h. Keyboard (see Keyboard on page 48). i. Hinge covers (see Hinge cover on page 55). j. Base enclosure (see Base enclosure on page 57). k. System board (see System board on page 59). l. Fan/heat sink assembly (see Fan and heat sink assembly on page 61). m. Top cover (see Top cover and TouchPad on page 65). Remove the speaker: 1. Disconnect the speaker cable (1)... 2. Remove 2 Phillips screws (2). 70 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
  • 81. 3. Lift the speaker assembly to remove it.(3). Reverse this procedure to install the speaker. Power button board NOTE: The power button board spare part kit includes the cable. Description Spare part number Power button board For 14" products 840694-001 For 15" products 840744-001 IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and replacement. Before removing the power button board, follow these steps: 1. Shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 3. Remove the following components: a. Service door (see Service door on page 37). b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38) c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39). d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41). e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42). Component replacement procedures 71
  • 82. f. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44). g. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46). h. Keyboard (see Keyboard on page 48). i. Hinge covers (see Hinge cover on page 55). j. Base enclosure (see Base enclosure on page 57). k. System board (see System board on page 59). l. Fan/heat sink assembly (see Fan and heat sink assembly on page 61). m. Top cover (see Top cover and TouchPad on page 65). Remove the power button board: ▲ Remove the 2 M2x3L, P1 screws (1), release the power button power button board cable (2), and them remove the power button board (3): Reverse this procedure to install the power button board. Fingerprint reader (select products only) NOTE: The fingerprint reader spare part kit includes the cable Description Spare part number Fingerprint reader For 14" products 840664-001 For 15" products 840735-001 72 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
  • 83. IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and replacement Before removing the fingerprint reader, follow these steps: 1. Shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 3. Disconnect the power from the computer by first unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet and then unplugging the AC adapter from the computer. 4. Remove the following components: a. Service door (see Service door on page 37). b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38) c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39). d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41). e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42). f. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44). g. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46). h. Keyboard (see Keyboard on page 48). i. Hinge covers (see Hinge cover on page 55). j. Base enclosure (see Base enclosure on page 57). k. System board (see System board on page 59). l. Fan/heat sink assembly (see Fan and heat sink assembly on page 61). m. Top cover (see Top cover and TouchPad on page 65). Remove the fingerprint reader: 1. Remove the Phillips screwfrom the fingerprint reader bracket(1). 2. Remove the bracket(2). Component replacement procedures 73
  • 84. 3. Remove the cable (3), and then remove the fingerprint reader (4). Reverse this procedure to install the fingerprint reader. Smart card reader NOTE: The smart card reader spare part kit includes the metal shield Description Spare part number Smart card reader board (includes metal shield) 840694-001 IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and replacement Before removing the smart card reader, follow these steps: 1. Shut down the computer. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 3. Disconnect the power from the computer by first unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet and then unplugging the AC adapter from the computer. 4. Remove the following components: a. Service door (see Service door on page 37). b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38) c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39). d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41). e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42). 74 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
  • 85. f. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44). g. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46). h. Keyboard (see Keyboard on page 48). i. Hinge covers (see Hinge cover on page 55). j. Base enclosure (see Base enclosure on page 57). k. System board (see System board on page 59). l. Fan/heat sink assembly (see Fan and heat sink assembly on page 61). m. Top cover (see Top cover and TouchPad on page 65). Remove the smart card reader: ▲ Remove the metal shield, and then lift the smart card reader to remove it. Reverse this procedure to install the smart card reader. Component replacement procedures 75
  • 86. Near Field Communication module Description Spare part number Near Field Communication (NFC) module 840661-001 For 14" products 840661-001 For 15" products 840729-001 Near Field Communication (NFC) cable For 14" products 840661-001 For 15" products 840729-001 IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and replacement Before removing the NFC module, follow these steps: 1. Turn off the computer. If you are unsure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 2. Disconnect the power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the computer. 3. Disconnect all external devices from the computer. 4. Remove the following components: a. Service door (see Service door on page 37). b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38) c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39). d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41). e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42). f. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44). g. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46). h. Keyboard (see Keyboard on page 48). i. Hinge covers (see Hinge cover on page 55). j. Base enclosure (see Base enclosure on page 57). k. System board (see System board on page 59). l. Fan/heat sink assembly (see Fan and heat sink assembly on page 61). m. Top cover (see Top cover and TouchPad on page 65). Remove the NFC module: ▲ Disconnect the NFC module (1), and then remove it (2). 76 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
  • 87. Reverse this procedure to replace the panel. Component replacement procedures 77
  • 88. Audio board Description Spare part number Audio board 840692-001 IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and replacement Before removing the audio board, follow these steps: 1. Turn off the computer. If you are unsure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 2. Disconnect the power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the computer. 3. Disconnect all external devices from the computer. 4. Remove the following components: a. Service door (see Service door on page 37). b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38) c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39). d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41). e. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46). f. Keyboard (see Keyboard on page 48). g. Hinge covers (see Hinge cover on page 55). h. Base enclosure (see Base enclosure on page 57). i. System board (see System board on page 59). j. Fan/heat sink assembly (see Fan and heat sink assembly on page 61). k. Top cover (see Top cover and TouchPad on page 65). Remove the audio board: ▲ Remove 2 M2x3L P1 screws (1), and then remove the audio board (2). 78 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
  • 89. Reverse this procedure to replace the audio board. Component replacement procedures 79
  • 90. Serial Description Spare part number Serial 840746-001 IMPORTANT: Make special note of each screw and screw lock size and location during removal and replacement Before removing the audio board, follow these steps: 1. Turn off the computer. If you are unsure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 2. Disconnect the power from the computer by unplugging the power cord from the computer. 3. Disconnect all external devices from the computer. 4. Remove the following components: a. Service door (see Service door on page 37). b. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38) c. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39). d. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41). e. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42). f. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44). g. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46). h. Keyboard (see Keyboard on page 48). i. Hinge covers (see Hinge cover on page 55). j. Base enclosure (see Base enclosure on page 57). k. System board (see System board on page 59). l. Fan/heat sink assembly (see Fan and heat sink assembly on page 61). m. Top cover (see Top cover and TouchPad on page 65). Remove the serial port: ▲ Remove 2 M2x3L P1 screws(1), remove the cable from the routing channels (2), and then remove the serial port(3). 80 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
  • 91. Reverse this procedure to replace the audio boardr. Component replacement procedures 81
  • 92. Display assembly All display assemblies include WLAN antenna transceivers and cables. WWAN models also include 2 WWAN antenna transceivers and cables. Full hinge-up displays are not spared. This section describes removing components that do not require that you entirely remove the display assembly from the computer. You can remove the display bezel, webcam/microphone module, and display panel with the display assembly still attached to the computer. To remove the remaining display components, including the display brackets, antennas, and enclosure, you must remove the entire display assembly from the computer. See Display assembly subcomponents on page 27 for more information about removing the remaining components. Description Spare part number Display panels ( [14.0-in], anti-glare, LED) Slim panel for 14" products 840697-001 Flat panel for 14" products 840698-001 Touch screen for 14" products (includes camera) 840687-001 Slim panel for 15" products 840748-001 Flat panel for 15" products 840749-001 Touch screen for 15" products (includes camera) 840740-001 Display bezels For 14" HP 640 products 840658-001 For 14" HP 645 products 841482-001 For 15" HP 650 products 840726-001 For 15" HP 655 products 842333-001 Before removing the display panel, follow these steps: 1. Shut down the computer. If you are unsure whether the computer is off or in Hibernation, turn the computer on, and then shut it down through the operating system. 2. Disconnect all external devices connected to the computer. 3. Disconnect the power from the computer by first unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet, and then unplugging the AC adapter from the computer. 4. Remove the service door (see Service door on page 37). 5. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38). 6. Remove the battery (see Battery on page 38) 7. Hard drive (see Hard drive on page 39). 8. Solid-state drive (see Solid-state drive (select products only) on page 41). 9. WWAN module (see WWAN module (select products only) on page 42). 10. WLAN module (see WLAN module on page 44). 82 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
  • 93. 11. Optical drive (see Optical drive on page 46). 12. Keyboard (see Keyboard on page 48). 13. Hinge covers (see Hinge cover on page 55). 14. Base enclosure (see Base enclosure on page 57). 15. System board (see System board on page 59). 16. Fan/heat sink assembly (see Fan and heat sink assembly on page 61). 17. Top cover (see Top cover and TouchPad on page 65). Remove the display assembly components: 1. Position the computer upright, with the front toward you. 2. Open the computer as far as possible. 3. If it is necessary to replace the display bezel: a. Close the computer, position it so you can access the bottom of the display, and then open the computer slightly. b. Flex the inside edges of the top edge (1), the left and right sides (2), and the bottom edge (3) of the display bezel until the bezel disengages from the display enclosure. The display bezel is available using spare part number 840658-001. 4. If it is necessary to replace the display panel: a. Remove the four M2x3L P1 screws that secure the display panel to the display enclosure. ● 781959-001—35.6-cm (14.0-in), LED, AntiGlare display panel, UWVA ● 784476-001—35.6-cm (14.0-in), LED, AntiGlare display panel, SVA HD+ Display assembly 83
  • 94. b. Rotate the top of the display panel downward (1) onto the keyboard. c. Disconnect the cable from the connector (2), and then remove the panel (3). 84 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
  • 95. 5. If it is necessary to replace the hinge brackets, remove the M2.5x2.5L P1 screws from each side (1), and then remove the hinge brackets (2). 6. If it is necessary to replace the WLAN antenna cables, remove the 3 screws from each side (1), and then remove the WLAN antenna cables (2). Display assembly 85
  • 96. 7. If it is necessary to replace the WWAN antenna cables (select products only, remove the 3 screws from each side (1), and then remove the WWAN antenna cables (2). 8. If it is necessary to replace the webcam: a. Disconnect the cable (1) from the webcam. b. Detach the webcam (2) from the display enclosure. The webcam module is available using spare part number 840722-001. 9. If it is necessary to replace the microphone board: a. Disconnect the cable (1) from the microphone board. 86 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement procedures for Authorized Service Provider parts
  • 97. b. Detach the microphone board (2) from the display enclosure. The microphone board is available using spare part number 840691-001. Reverse these procedures to reassemble and install the display assembly components. Display assembly 87
  • 98. 7 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start in Windows 10 Using Computer Setup Computer Setup, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as disk drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Computer Setup includes settings for the types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and the amount of system and extended memory. NOTE: Use extreme care when making changes in Computer Setup. Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. Starting Computer Setup NOTE: An external keyboard or mouse connected to a USB port can be used with Computer Setup only if USB legacy support is enabled. To start Computer Setup, follow these steps: ▲ Start Computer Setup. ● Computers or tablets with keyboards: ▲ Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. ● Tablets without keyboards: ▲ Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap F10 to enter Computer Setup. Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup ● To select a menu or a menu item, use the tab key and the keyboard arrow keys and then press enter, or use a pointing device to select the item. NOTE: On tablets without keyboards, you can use your finger to make selections. ● To scroll up and down, select the up arrow or the down arrow in the upper-right corner of the screen, or use the up arrow key or the down arrow key on the keyboard. ● To close open dialog boxes and return to the main Computer Setup screen, press esc, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 88 Chapter 7 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start in Windows 10
  • 99. To exit Computer Setup menus, choose one of the following methods: ● To exit Computer Setup menus without saving your changes: Select the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. – or – Select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter. ● To save your changes and exit Computer Setup menus: Select the Save icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. – or – Select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup NOTE: Restoring defaults will not change the hard drive mode. To return all settings in Computer Setup to the values that were set at the factory, follow these steps: 1. Start Computer Setup. See Starting Computer Setup on page 88. 2. Select Main, and then select Apply Factory Defaults and Exit. NOTE: On select products, the selections may display Restore Defaults instead of Apply Factory Defaults and Exit. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. 4. To save your changes and exit, select the Save icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. – or – Select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. NOTE: Your password settings and security settings are not changed when you restore the factory settings. Using Computer Setup 89
  • 100. Updating the BIOS Updated versions of the BIOS may be available on the HP website. Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. Determining the BIOS version To decide whether you need to update Computer Setup (BIOS), first determine the BIOS version on your computer. BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) can be accessed by pressing fn+esc (if you are already in Windows) or by using Computer Setup. 1. Start Computer Setup. See Starting Computer Setup on page 88. 2. Select Main, and then select System Information. 3. To exit Computer Setup without saving your changes, select the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. – or – Select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter. To check for later BIOS versions, see Downloading a BIOS update on page 90. Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions: Do not disconnect power on the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. 1. Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. – or – Select the question mark icon in the taskbar. 2. Select Updates, and then select Check for updates and messages. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. 4. At the download area, follow these steps: a. Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. Make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. 90 Chapter 7 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start in Windows 10
  • 101. NOTE: If you connect your computer to a network, consult the network administrator before installing any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are revealed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are revealed, follow these steps: 1. Type file in the taskbar search box, and then select File Explorer. 2. Select your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). 3. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder that contains the update. 4. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. 5. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. Changing the boot order using the f9 prompt To dynamically choose a boot device for the current startup sequence, follow these steps: 1. Access the Boot Device Options menu: ● Computers or tablets with keyboards: ▲ Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f9 to enter the Boot Device Options menu. ● Tablets without keyboards: ▲ Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap F9 to enter the Boot Device Options menu. 2. Select a boot device, then press enter. TPM BIOS settings (select products only) IMPORTANT: Before enabling Trusted Platform Module (TPM) functionality on this system, you must ensure that your intended use of TPM complies with relevant local laws, regulations and policies, and approvals or licenses must be obtained if applicable. For any compliance issues arising from your operation/usage of TPM which violates the above mentioned requirement, you shall bear all the liabilities wholly and solely. HP will not be responsible for any related liabilities. TPM provides additional security for your computer. You can modify the TPM settings in Computer Setup (BIOS). NOTE: If you change the TPM setting to Hidden, TPM is not visible in the operating system. To access TPM settings in Computer Setup: 1. Start Computer Setup. See Starting Computer Setup on page 88. 2. Select Security, select TPM Embedded Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions. TPM BIOS settings (select products only) 91
  • 102. Using HP Sure Start (select products only) Select computer models are configured with HP Sure Start, a technology that continuously monitors the computer's BIOS for attacks or corruption. If the BIOS becomes corrupted or is attacked, HP Sure Start automatically restores the BIOS to its previously safe state, without user intervention. HP Sure Start is configured and already enabled so that most users can use the HP Sure Start default configuration. The default configuration can be customized by advanced users. To access the latest documentation on HP Sure Start, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Find your product, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 92 Chapter 7 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start in Windows 10
  • 103. 8 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start in Windows 8.1 Using Computer Setup Computer Setup, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as disk drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Computer Setup includes settings for the types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and the amount of system and extended memory. NOTE: Use extreme care when making changes in Computer Setup. Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. Starting Computer Setup NOTE: An external keyboard or mouse connected to a USB port can be used with Computer Setup only if USB legacy support is enabled. To start Computer Setup, follow these steps: ▲ Start Computer Setup. ● Computers or tablets with keyboards: ▲ Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. ● Tablets without keyboards: ▲ Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap F10 to enter Computer Setup. Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup ● To select a menu or a menu item, use the tab key and the keyboard arrow keys and then press enter, or use a pointing device to select the item. NOTE: On tablets without keyboards, you can use your finger to make selections. ● To scroll up and down, select the up arrow or the down arrow in the upper-right corner of the screen, or use the up arrow key or the down arrow key on the keyboard. ● To close open dialog boxes and return to the main Computer Setup screen, press esc, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using Computer Setup 93
  • 104. To exit Computer Setup menus, choose one of the following methods: ● To exit Computer Setup menus without saving your changes: Select the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. – or – Select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter. ● To save your changes and exit Computer Setup menus: Select the Save icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. – or – Select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup NOTE: Restoring defaults will not change the hard drive mode. To return all settings in Computer Setup to the values that were set at the factory, follow these steps: 1. Start Computer Setup. See Starting Computer Setup on page 93. 2. Select Main, and then select Apply Factory Defaults and Exit. NOTE: On select products, the selections may display Restore Defaults instead of Apply Factory Defaults and Exit. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. 4. To save your changes and exit, select the Save icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. – or – Select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. NOTE: Your password settings and security settings are not changed when you restore the factory settings. 94 Chapter 8 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start in Windows 8.1
  • 105. Updating the BIOS Updated versions of the BIOS may be available on the HP website. Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. Determining the BIOS version To decide whether you need to update Computer Setup (BIOS), first determine the BIOS version on your computer. BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) can be accessed by pressing fn+esc (if you are already in Windows) or by using Computer Setup. 1. Start Computer Setup. See Starting Computer Setup on page 93. 2. Select Main, and then select System Information. 3. To exit Computer Setup without saving your changes, select the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. – or – Select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter. To check for later BIOS versions, see Downloading a BIOS update on page 95. Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions: Do not disconnect power on the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. 1. From the Start screen, type support, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. 2. Make the selection for updates. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. 4. At the download area, follow these steps: a. Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. Make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. NOTE: If you connect your computer to a network, consult the network administrator before installing any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. Using Computer Setup 95
  • 106. BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are revealed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are revealed, follow these steps: 1. From the Start screen, type file, and then select File Explorer. 2. Select your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). 3. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder that contains the update. 4. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. 5. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. Changing the boot order using the f9 prompt To dynamically choose a boot device for the current startup sequence, follow these steps: 1. Access the Boot Device Options menu: ● Computers or tablets with keyboards: ▲ Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f9 to enter the Boot Device Options menu. ● Tablets without keyboards: ▲ Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap F9 to enter the Boot Device Options menu. 2. Select a boot device, then press enter. TPM BIOS settings (select products only) IMPORTANT: Before enabling Trusted Platform Module (TPM) functionality on this system, you must ensure that your intended use of TPM complies with relevant local laws, regulations and policies, and approvals or licenses must be obtained if applicable. For any compliance issues arising from your operation/usage of TPM which violates the above mentioned requirement, you shall bear all the liabilities wholly and solely. HP will not be responsible for any related liabilities. TPM provides additional security for your computer. You can modify the TPM settings in Computer Setup (BIOS). NOTE: If you change the TPM setting to Hidden, TPM is not visible in the operating system. To access TPM settings in Computer Setup: 1. Start Computer Setup. See Starting Computer Setup on page 93. 2. Select Security, select TPM Embedded Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 96 Chapter 8 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start in Windows 8.1
  • 107. Using HP Sure Start (select products only) Select computer models are configured with HP Sure Start, a technology that continuously monitors the computer's BIOS for attacks or corruption. If the BIOS becomes corrupted or is attacked, HP Sure Start automatically restores the BIOS to its previously safe state, without user intervention. HP Sure Start is configured and already enabled so that most users can use the HP Sure Start default configuration. The default configuration can be customized by advanced users. To access the latest documentation on HP Sure Start, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Find your product, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP Sure Start (select products only) 97
  • 108. 9 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start in Windows 7 Using Computer Setup Computer Setup, or Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), controls communication between all the input and output devices on the system (such as disk drives, display, keyboard, mouse, and printer). Computer Setup includes settings for the types of devices installed, the startup sequence of the computer, and the amount of system and extended memory. NOTE: Use extreme care when making changes in Computer Setup. Errors can prevent the computer from operating properly. Starting Computer Setup NOTE: An external keyboard or mouse connected to a USB port can be used with Computer Setup only if USB legacy support is enabled. To start Computer Setup, follow these steps: ▲ Start Computer Setup. ● Computers or tablets with keyboards: ▲ Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f10 to enter Computer Setup. ● Tablets without keyboards: ▲ Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap F10 to enter Computer Setup. Navigating and selecting in Computer Setup ● To select a menu or a menu item, use the tab key and the keyboard arrow keys and then press enter, or use a pointing device to select the item. NOTE: On tablets without keyboards, you can use your finger to make selections. ● To scroll up and down, select the up arrow or the down arrow in the upper-right corner of the screen, or use the up arrow key or the down arrow key on the keyboard. ● To close open dialog boxes and return to the main Computer Setup screen, press esc, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 98 Chapter 9 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start in Windows 7
  • 109. To exit Computer Setup menus, choose one of the following methods: ● To exit Computer Setup menus without saving your changes: Select the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. – or – Select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter. ● To save your changes and exit Computer Setup menus: Select the Save icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. – or – Select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. Restoring factory settings in Computer Setup NOTE: Restoring defaults will not change the hard drive mode. To return all settings in Computer Setup to the values that were set at the factory, follow these steps: 1. Start Computer Setup. See Starting Computer Setup on page 98. 2. Select Main, and then select Apply Factory Defaults and Exit. NOTE: On select products, the selections may display Restore Defaults instead of Apply Factory Defaults and Exit. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. 4. To save your changes and exit, select the Save icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. – or – Select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then press enter. Your changes go into effect when the computer restarts. NOTE: Your password settings and security settings are not changed when you restore the factory settings. Using Computer Setup 99
  • 110. Updating the BIOS Updated versions of the BIOS may be available on the HP website. Most BIOS updates on the HP website are packaged in compressed files called SoftPaqs. Some download packages contain a file named Readme.txt, which contains information regarding installing and troubleshooting the file. Determining the BIOS version To decide whether you need to update Computer Setup (BIOS), first determine the BIOS version on your computer. BIOS version information (also known as ROM date and System BIOS) can be accessed by pressing fn+esc (if you are already in Windows) or by using Computer Setup. 1. Start Computer Setup. See Starting Computer Setup on page 98. 2. Select Main, and then select System Information. 3. To exit Computer Setup without saving your changes, select the Exit icon in the lower-right corner of the screen, and then follow the on-screen instructions. – or – Select Main, select Ignore Changes and Exit, and then press enter. To check for later BIOS versions, see Downloading a BIOS update on page 100. Downloading a BIOS update CAUTION: To reduce the risk of damage to the computer or an unsuccessful installation, download and install a BIOS update only when the computer is connected to reliable external power using the AC adapter. Do not download or install a BIOS update while the computer is running on battery power, docked in an optional docking device, or connected to an optional power source. During the download and installation, follow these instructions: Do not disconnect power on the computer by unplugging the power cord from the AC outlet. Do not shut down the computer or initiate Sleep. Do not insert, remove, connect, or disconnect any device, cable, or cord. 1. Access Help and Support by selecting Start > All Programs > HP Help and Support > HP Support Assistant. 2. Make the selection for updates. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. 4. At the download area, follow these steps: a. Identify the most recent BIOS update and compare it to the BIOS version currently installed on your computer. Make a note of the date, name, or other identifier. You may need this information to locate the update later, after it has been downloaded to your hard drive. b. Follow the on-screen instructions to download your selection to the hard drive. Make a note of the path to the location on your hard drive where the BIOS update is downloaded. You will need to access this path when you are ready to install the update. 100 Chapter 9 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start in Windows 7
  • 111. NOTE: If you connect your computer to a network, consult the network administrator before installing any software updates, especially system BIOS updates. BIOS installation procedures vary. Follow any instructions that are revealed on the screen after the download is complete. If no instructions are revealed, follow these steps: 1. Select Start > Computer. 2. Select your hard drive designation. The hard drive designation is typically Local Disk (C:). 3. Using the hard drive path you recorded earlier, open the folder that contains the update. 4. Double-click the file that has an .exe extension (for example, filename.exe). The BIOS installation begins. 5. Complete the installation by following the on-screen instructions. NOTE: After a message on the screen reports a successful installation, you can delete the downloaded file from your hard drive. Changing the boot order using the f9 prompt To dynamically choose a boot device for the current startup sequence, follow these steps: 1. Access the Boot Device Options menu: ● Computers or tablets with keyboards: ▲ Turn on or restart the computer, and when the HP logo appears, press f9 to enter the Boot Device Options menu. ● Tablets without keyboards: ▲ Turn off the tablet. Press the power button in combination with the volume down button until the Startup menu is displayed, and then tap F9 to enter the Boot Device Options menu. 2. Select a boot device, then press enter. TPM BIOS settings (select products only) IMPORTANT: Before enabling Trusted Platform Module (TPM) functionality on this system, you must ensure that your intended use of TPM complies with relevant local laws, regulations and policies, and approvals or licenses must be obtained if applicable. For any compliance issues arising from your operation/usage of TPM which violates the above mentioned requirement, you shall bear all the liabilities wholly and solely. HP will not be responsible for any related liabilities. TPM provides additional security for your computer. You can modify the TPM settings in Computer Setup (BIOS). NOTE: If you change the TPM setting to Hidden, TPM is not visible in the operating system. To access TPM settings in Computer Setup: 1. Start Computer Setup. See Starting Computer Setup on page 98. 2. Select Security, select TPM Embedded Security, and then follow the on-screen instructions. TPM BIOS settings (select products only) 101
  • 112. Using HP Sure Start (select products only) Select computer models are configured with HP Sure Start, a technology that continuously monitors the computer's BIOS for attacks or corruption. If the BIOS becomes corrupted or is attacked, HP Sure Start automatically restores the BIOS to its previously safe state, without user intervention. HP Sure Start is configured and already enabled so that most users can use the HP Sure Start default configuration. The default configuration can be customized by advanced users. To access the latest documentation on HP Sure Start, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Find your product, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 102 Chapter 9 Computer Setup (BIOS), TPM, and HP Sure Start in Windows 7
  • 113. 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) HP PC Hardware Diagnostics is a Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) that allows you to run diagnostic tests to determine whether the computer hardware is functioning properly. The tool runs outside the operating system so that it can isolate hardware failures from issues that are caused by the operating system or other software components. When HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) detects a failure that requires hardware replacement, a 24-digit Failure ID code is generated. This ID code can then be provided to support to help determine how to correct the problem. NOTE: To start diagnostics on a convertible computer, your computer must be in notebook mode and you must use the keyboard attached. To start HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI), follow these steps: 1. Turn on or restart the computer, and quickly press esc. 2. Press f2. The BIOS searches three places for the diagnostic tools, in the following order: a. Connected USB drive NOTE: To download the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) tool to a USB drive, see Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device on page 103. b. Hard drive c. BIOS 3. When the diagnostic tool opens, select the type of diagnostic test you want to run, and then follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE: If you need to stop a diagnostic test, press esc. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device NOTE: The HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) download instructions are provided in English only, and you must use a Windows computer to download and create the HP UEFI support environment because only .exe files are offered. There are two options to download HP PC Hardware Diagnostics to a USB device. Download the latest UEFI version 1. Go to http://www.hp.com/go/techcenter/pcdiags. The HP PC Diagnostics home page is displayed. 2. In the HP PC Hardware Diagnostics section, click the Download link, and then select Run. Download any version of UEFI for a specific product 1. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, and then select your country. The HP Support page is displayed. 2. Click Drivers & Downloads. Downloading HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) to a USB device 103
  • 114. 3. Use the categories listed to find your product. – or – Click Find Now to let HP automatically detect your product. 4. Select your computer, and then select your operating system. 5. In the Diagnostic section, follow the on-screen instructions to select and download the UEFI version you want. 104 Chapter 10 Using HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI)
  • 115. 11 Backup and recovery This chapter provides information about the following processes. The information in the chapter is standard procedure for most products. ● Creating recovery media and backups ● Restoring and recovering your system For additional information, refer to the HP support assistant app. ▲ Type support in the taskbar search box, and then select the HP Support Assistant app. ‒ or – Click the question mark icon in the taskbar. IMPORTANT: If you will be performing recovery procedures on a tablet, the tablet battery must be at least 70% charged before you start the recovery process. IMPORTANT: For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the keyboard to the keyboard dock before beginning any recovery process. Creating recovery media and backups The following methods of creating recovery media and backups are available on select products only. Choose the available method according to your computer model. ● Use HP Recovery Manager to create HP Recovery media after you successfully set up the computer. This step creates a backup of the HP Recovery partition on the computer. The backup can be used to reinstall the original operating system in cases where the hard drive is corrupted or has been replaced. For information on creating recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 105. For information on the recovery options that are available using the recovery media, see Using Windows tools on page 106. ● Use Windows tools to create system restore points and create backups of personal information. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 107. NOTE: If storage is 32 GB or less, Microsoft System Restore is disabled by default. Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) If possible, check for the presence of the Recovery partition and the Windows partition. From the Start menu, select File Explorer, and then select This PC. ● If your computer does not list the Windows partition and the Recovery partition, you can obtain recovery media for your system from support. See the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer. You can also find contact information on the HP website. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions. Creating recovery media and backups 105
  • 116. You can use Windows tools to create system restore points and create backups of personal information, see Using Windows tools on page 106. ● If your computer does list the Recovery partition and the Windows partition, you can use HP Recovery Manager to create recovery media after you successfully set up the computer. HP Recovery media can be used to perform system recovery if the hard drive becomes corrupted. System recovery reinstalls the original operating system and software programs that were installed at the factory and then configures the settings for the programs. HP Recovery media can also be used to customize the system or restore the factory image if you replace the hard drive. ◦ Only one set of recovery media can be created. Handle these recovery tools carefully, and keep them in a safe place. ◦ HP Recovery Manager examines the computer and determines the required storage capacity for the media that will be required. ◦ To create recovery discs, your computer must have an optical drive with DVD writer capability, and you must use only high-quality blank DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-R DL, or DVD+R DL discs. Do not use rewritable discs such as CD±RW, DVD±RW, double-layer DVD±RW, or BD-RE (rewritable Blu-ray) discs; they are not compatible with HP Recovery Manager software. Or, instead, you can use a high- quality blank USB flash drive. ◦ If your computer does not include an integrated optical drive with DVD writer capability, but you would like to create DVD recovery media, you can use an external optical drive (purchased separately) to create recovery discs. If you use an external optical drive, it must be connected directly to a USB port on the computer; the drive cannot be connected to a USB port on an external device, such as a USB hub. If you cannot create DVD media yourself, you can obtain recovery discs for your computer from HP. See the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer. You can also find contact information on the HP website. Go to http://www.hp.com/ support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions. ◦ Be sure that the computer is connected to AC power before you begin creating the recovery media. ◦ The creation process can take an hour or more. Do not interrupt the creation process. ◦ If necessary, you can exit the program before you have finished creating all of the recovery DVDs. HP Recovery Manager will finish burning the current DVD. The next time you start HP Recovery Manager, you will be prompted to continue. To create HP Recovery media: IMPORTANT: For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the keyboard to the keyboard dock before beginning these steps. 1. Type recovery in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Recovery Manager. 2. Select Create recovery media, and then follow the on-screen instructions. If you ever need to recover the system, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 107. Using Windows tools You can create recovery media, system restore points, and backups of personal information using Windows tools. NOTE: If storage is 32 GB or less, Microsoft System Restore is disabled by default. For more information and steps, see the Get started app. ▲ Select the Start button, and then select the Get started app. 106 Chapter 11 Backup and recovery
  • 117. Restore and recovery There are several options for recovering your system. Choose the method that best matches your situation and level of expertise: IMPORTANT: Not all methods are available on all products. ● Windows offers several options for restoring from backup, refreshing the computer, and resetting the computer to its original state. For more information see the Get started app. ▲ Select the Start button, and then select the Get started app. ● If you need to correct a problem with a preinstalled application or driver, use the Reinstall drivers and/or applications option (select products only) of HP Recovery Manager to reinstall the individual application or driver. ▲ Type recovery in the taskbar search box, select HP Recovery Manager, select Reinstall drivers and/or applications, and then follow the on-screen instructions. ● If you want to recover the Windows partition to original factory content, you can choose the System Recovery option from the HP Recovery partition (select products only) or use the HP Recovery media. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 107. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 105. ● On select products, if you want to recover the computer's original factory partition and content, or if you have replaced the hard drive, you can use the Factory Reset option of HP Recovery media. For more information, see Recovering using HP Recovery Manager on page 107. ● On select products, if you want to remove the recovery partition to reclaim hard drive space, HP Recovery Manager offers the Remove Recovery Partition option. For more information, see Removing the HP Recovery partition (select products only) on page 110. Recovering using HP Recovery Manager HP Recovery Manager software allows you to recover the computer to its original factory state by using the HP Recovery media that you either created or that you obtained from HP, or by using the HP Recovery partition (select products only). If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 105. What you need to know before you get started ● HP Recovery Manager recovers only software that was installed at the factory. For software not provided with this computer, you must either download the software from the manufacturer's website or reinstall the software from the media provided by the manufacturer. IMPORTANT: Recovery through HP Recovery Manager should be used as a final attempt to correct computer issues. ● HP Recovery media must be used if the computer hard drive fails. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 105. ● To use the Factory Reset option (select products only), you must use HP Recovery media. If you have not already created recovery media, see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 105. ● If your computer does not allow the creation of HP Recovery media or if the HP Recovery media does not work, you can obtain recovery media for your system from support. See the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer. You can also find contact information from the HP Restore and recovery 107
  • 118. website. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions. IMPORTANT: HP Recovery Manager does not automatically provide backups of your personal data. Before beginning recovery, back up any personal data you want to retain. Using HP Recovery media, you can choose from one of the following recovery options: NOTE: Only the options available for your computer display when you start the recovery process. ● System Recovery—Reinstalls the original operating system, and then configures the settings for the programs that were installed at the factory. ● Factory Reset—Restores the computer to its original factory state by deleting all information from the hard drive and re-creating the partitions. Then it reinstalls the operating system and the software that was installed at the factory. The HP Recovery partition (select products only) allows System Recovery only. Using the HP Recovery partition (select products only) The HP Recovery partition allows you to perform a system recovery without the need for recovery discs or a recovery USB flash drive. This type of recovery can be used only if the hard drive is still working. To start HP Recovery Manager from the HP Recovery partition: IMPORTANT: For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the keyboard to the keyboard dock before beginning these steps (select products only). 1. Type recovery in the taskbar search box, select Recovery Manager, and then select HP Recovery Environment. - or- For computers or tablets with keyboards attached, press f11 while the computer boots, or press and hold f11 as you press the power button. For tablets without keyboards: Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button; then select f11. - or - Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the Windows button; then select f11. 2. Select Troubleshoot from the boot options menu. 3. Select Recovery Manager, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP Recovery media to recover You can use HP Recovery media to recover the original system. This method can be used if your system does not have an HP Recovery partition or if the hard drive is not working properly. 1. If possible, back up all personal files. 2. Insert the HP Recovery media, and then restart the computer. NOTE: If the computer does not automatically restart in HP Recovery Manager, change the computer boot order. See Changing the computer boot order on page 109. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. 108 Chapter 11 Backup and recovery
  • 119. Changing the computer boot order If your computer does not restart in HP Recovery Manager, you can change the computer boot order, which is the order of devices listed in BIOS where the computer looks for startup information. You can change the selection to an optical drive or a USB flash drive. To change the boot order: IMPORTANT: For a tablet with a detachable keyboard, connect the keyboard to the keyboard dock before beginning these steps. 1. Insert the HP Recovery media. 2. Access BIOS: For computers or tablets with keyboards attached: ▲ Turn on or restart the computer or tablet, quickly press esc, and then press f9 for boot options. For tablets without keyboards: ▲ Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the volume down button; then select f9. - or - Turn on or restart the tablet, and then quickly hold down the Windows button; then select f9. 3. Select the optical drive or USB flash drive from which you want to boot. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. Restore and recovery 109
  • 120. Removing the HP Recovery partition (select products only) HP Recovery Manager software allows you to remove the HP Recovery partition to free up hard drive space. IMPORTANT: After you remove the HP Recovery partition, you will not be able to perform System Recovery or create HP recovery media from the HP Recovery partition. So before you remove the Recovery partition, create HP Recovery media; see Creating HP Recovery media (select products only) on page 105. NOTE: The Remove Recovery Partition option is only available on products that support this function. Follow these steps to remove the HP Recovery partition: 1. Type recovery in the taskbar search box, and then select HP Recovery Manager. 2. Select Remove Recovery Partition, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 110 Chapter 11 Backup and recovery
  • 121. 12 Backup and recovery in Windows 8.1 To protect your information, use Windows backup and restore utilities to back up individual files and folders, back up your entire hard drive, create system repair media (select products only) by using the installed optical drive (select products only) or an optional external optical drive, or create system restore points. In case of system failure, you can use the backup files to restore the contents of your computer. From the Start screen, type restore, and then select from the list of displayed options. NOTE: For detailed instructions on various backup and restore options, perform a search for these topics in Windows Help and Support. In case of system instability, HP recommends that you print the recovery procedures and save them for later use. NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. For more information, see Windows Help and Support. Backing up your information Recovery after a system failure is as good as your most recent backup. You should create system repair media and your initial backup immediately after initial system setup. As you add new software and data files, you should continue to back up your system on a regular basis to maintain a reasonably current backup. For more information on the Windows backup features, see Windows Help and Support. Performing a system recovery In case of system failure or instability, the computer provides the following tools to recover your files: ● Windows recovery tools: You can use Windows Backup and Restore to recover information you have previously backed up. You can also use Windows Automatic Repair to fix problems that might prevent Windows from starting correctly. ● f11 recovery tools: You can use the f11 recovery tools to recover your original hard drive image. The image includes the Windows operating system and software programs installed at the factory. NOTE: If you are unable to boot (start up) your computer and you cannot use the system repair media you previously created (select products only), you must purchase Windows operating system media to reboot the computer and repair the operating system. For additional information, see Using Windows operating system media (purchased separately) on page 113. Using the Windows recovery tools To recover information you previously backed up, see Windows Help and Support for steps on restoring files and folders. To recover your information using Automatic Repair, follow these steps: Backing up your information 111
  • 122. CAUTION: Some Startup Repair options will completely erase and reformat the hard drive. All files you have created and any software installed on the computer are permanently removed. When reformatting is complete, the recovery process restores the operating system, as well as the drivers, software, and utilities from the backup used for recovery. 1. If possible, back up all personal files. 2. If possible, check for the presence of the Recovery Image partition and the Windows partition. From the Start screen, type file, and then click File Explorer. – or – From the Start screen, type pc, and then select This PC. NOTE: If the Windows partition and the Recovery Image partition are not listed, you must recover your operating system and programs using the Windows operating system DVD and the Driver Recovery media (both purchased separately). For additional information, see Using Windows operating system media (purchased separately) on page 113. 3. If the Windows partition and the Recovery Image partition are listed, restart the computer by pressing and holding the shift key while clicking Restart. 4. Select Troubleshoot, then select Advanced Options, and then select Startup Repair. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE: For additional information on recovering information using the Windows tools, perform a search for these topics in Windows Help and Support. Using f11 recovery tools CAUTION: Using f11 completely erases hard drive contents and reformats the hard drive. All files that you have created and any software that you have installed on the computer are permanently removed. The f11 recovery tool reinstalls the operating system and HP programs and drivers that were installed at the factory. Software not installed at the factory must be reinstalled. To recover the original hard drive image using f11: 1. If possible, back up all personal files. 2. If possible, check for the presence of the Recovery Image partition: From the Start screen, type pc, and then select This PC. NOTE: If the Recovery Image partition is not listed, you must recover your operating system and programs using the Windows operating system media and the Driver Recovery media (both purchased separately). For additional information, see Using Windows operating system media (purchased separately) on page 113. 3. If the Recovery Image partition is listed, restart the computer, and then press esc while the "Press the ESC key for Startup Menu" message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. 4. Press f11 while the "Press <F11> for recovery" message is displayed on the screen. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. 112 Chapter 12 Backup and recovery in Windows 8.1
  • 123. Using Windows operating system media (purchased separately) To order a Windows operating system DVD, contact support. See the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer. You can also find contact information from the HP website. Go to http://www.hp.com/support, select your country or region, and follow the on-screen instructions. CAUTION: Using a Windows operating system media completely erases hard drive contents and reformats the hard drive. All files that you have created and any software that you have installed on the computer are permanently removed. When reformatting is complete, the recovery process helps you restore the operating system, as well as drivers, software, and utilities. To initiate a full install of the operating system using a Windows operating system DVD: NOTE: This process takes several minutes. 1. If possible, back up all personal files. 2. Insert the Windows operating system DVD into the optical drive, and then restart the computer. 3. When prompted, press any keyboard key. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. After the installation is completed: 1. Eject the Windows operating system media and then insert the Driver Recovery media. 2. Install the Hardware Enabling Drivers first, and then install Recommended Applications. Using Windows Refresh or Windows Reset When your computer is not working properly and you need to regain system stability, the Windows Refresh option allows you to start fresh and keep what is important to you. The Windows Reset option allows you to perform detailed reformatting of your computer, or remove personal information before you give away or recycle your computer. For more information on these features, see Windows Help and Support. Using HP Software Setup HP Software Setup can be used to reinstall drivers or select software that has been corrupted or deleted from the system. 1. From the Start screen, type HP Software Setup. 2. Open HP Software Setup. 3. Follow the on-screen directions to reinstall drivers or select software. Performing a system recovery 113
  • 124. 13 Backup and recovery in Windows 7 Your computer includes HP and Windows tools to help you safeguard your information and retrieve it if you ever need to. These tools will help you return your computer to a proper working state, all with simple steps. This section provides information about the following processes: ● Creating recovery media and backups ● Restoring and recovering your system Creating recovery media and backups Recovery after a system failure is only as good as your most recent backup. 1. After you successfully set up the computer, create HP Recovery media. This step creates a Windows 7 operating system DVD and a Driver Recovery DVD. The Windows DVD can be used to reinstall the original operating system in cases where the hard drive is corrupted or has been replaced. The Driver Recovery DVD installs specific drivers and applications. See Creating recovery media with HP Recovery Disc Creator on page 114. 2. Use Windows Backup and Recovery tools to perform the following: ● Back up individual files and folders ● Back up your entire hard drive (select products only) ● Create system repair discs (select products only) with the installed optical drive (select products only) or an optional external optical drive ● Create system restore points NOTE: This guide describes an overview of backing up, restoring, and recovering options. For more details about the tools provided, see Help and Support. To access Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support. NOTE: HP recommends that you print the recovery procedures and save them for later use, in case of system instability. In case of system failure, you can use the backup files to restore the contents of your computer. See Backing up your information on page 115. Guidelines ● When creating recovery media or backing up to discs, use any of the following types of discs (purchased separately): DVD+R, DVD+R DL, DVD-R, DVD-R DL, or DVD-RW. The discs you use will depend on the type of optical drive you are using. ● Be sure that the computer is connected to AC power before you start the recovery media creation process or the backup process. Creating recovery media with HP Recovery Disc Creator HP Recovery Disc Creator is a software program that offers an alternative way to create recovery media. After you successfully set up the computer, you can create recovery media using HP Recovery Disc Creator. This recovery media allows you to reinstall your original operating system as well as select drivers and 114 Chapter 13 Backup and recovery in Windows 7
  • 125. applications if the hard drive becomes corrupted. HP Recovery Disc Creator can create two kinds of recovery DVDs: ● Windows 7 operating system DVD—Installs the operating system without additional drivers or applications. ● Driver Recovery DVD—Installs specific drivers and applications only, in the same way that the HP Software Setup utility installs drivers and applications. Creating recovery media NOTE: The Windows 7 operating system DVD can be created only once. Thereafter, the option to create that media will not be available after you create a Windows DVD. To create the Windows DVD: 1. Select Start > All Programs > Productivity and Tools > HP Recovery Disc Creator. 2. Select Windows disk. 3. From the drop-down menu, select the drive for burning the recovery media. 4. Click the Create button to start the burning process. After the Windows 7 operating system DVD has been created, create the Driver Recovery DVD: 1. Select Start > All Programs > Productivity and Tools > HP Recovery Disc Creator. 2. Select Driver disk. 3. From the drop-down menu, select the drive for burning the recovery media. 4. Click the Create button to start the burning process. Backing up your information You should create system repair media and your initial backup immediately after initial system setup. As you add new software and data files, you should continue to back up your system on a regular basis to maintain a reasonably current backup. You should also create Windows system repair media (select products only) which can be used to start up (boot) the computer and repair the operating system in case of system instability or failure. Your initial and subsequent backups allow you to restore your data and settings if a failure occurs. You can back up your information to an optional external hard drive, a network drive, or discs. Note the following when backing up: ● Store personal files in the Documents library, and back it up regularly. ● Back up templates that are stored in their associated directories. ● Save customized settings that appear in a window, toolbar, or menu bar by taking a screen shot of your settings. The screen shot can be a time-saver if you have to reset your preferences. ● When backing up to discs, number each disc after removing it from the drive. NOTE: For detailed instructions on various backup and restore options, perform a search for these topics in Help and Support. To access Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support. NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support. To access Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support. Creating recovery media and backups 115
  • 126. To create a backup using Windows Backup and Restore: NOTE: The backup process may take over an hour, depending on file size and the speed of the computer. 1. Select Start > All Programs > Maintenance > Backup and Restore. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up your backup, create a system image (select products only), or create system repair media (select products only). Performing a system recovery In case of system failure or instability, the computer provides the following tools to recover your files: ● Windows recovery tools: You can use Windows Backup and Restore to recover information you have previously backed up. You can also use Windows Startup Repair to fix problems that might prevent Windows from starting correctly. ● f11 recovery tools (select products only): You can use the f11 recovery tools to recover your original hard drive image. The image includes the Windows operating system and software programs installed at the factory. NOTE: If you are unable to boot (start up) your computer and you cannot use the system repair media you previously created (select products only), you must purchase Windows 7 operating system media to reboot the computer and repair the operating system. For additional information, see Using Windows 7 operating system media on page 117. Using the Windows recovery tools Using the Windows recovery tools, you can: ● Recover individual files ● Restore the computer to a previous system restore point ● Recover information using recovery tools NOTE: For detailed instructions on various recovery and restore options, perform a search for these topics in Help and Support. To access Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support. NOTE: Windows includes the User Account Control feature to improve the security of your computer. You may be prompted for your permission or password for tasks such as installing software, running utilities, or changing Windows settings. Refer to Help and Support. To access Help and Support, select Start > Help and Support. To recover information you previously backed up: 1. Select Start > All Programs > Maintenance > Backup and Restore. 2. Follow the on-screen instructions to recover your system settings, your computer (select products only), or your files. To recover your information using Startup Repair, follow these steps: CAUTION: Some Startup Repair options will completely erase and reformat the hard drive. All files you have created and any software installed on the computer are permanently removed. When reformatting is complete, the recovery process restores the operating system, as well as the drivers, software, and utilities from the backup used for recovery. 116 Chapter 13 Backup and recovery in Windows 7
  • 127. 1. If possible, back up all personal files. 2. If possible, check for the presence of the Windows partition. To check for the Windows partition, select Start > Computer. NOTE: If the Windows partition is not listed, you must recover your operating system and programs using the Windows 7 operating system DVD and the Driver Recovery media. For additional information, see Using Windows 7 operating system media on page 117. 3. If the Windows partition is listed, restart the computer, and then press f8 before the Windows operating system loads. 4. Select Startup Repair. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. NOTE: For additional information on recovering information using the Windows tools, select Start > Help and Support. Using f11 recovery tools (select products only) CAUTION: Using f11 completely erases hard drive contents and reformats the hard drive. All files that you have created and any software that you have installed on the computer are permanently removed. The f11 recovery tool reinstalls the operating system and HP programs and drivers that were installed at the factory. Software not installed at the factory must be reinstalled. To recover the original hard drive image using f11: 1. If possible, back up all personal files. 2. If possible, check for the presence of the HP Recovery partition: click Start, right-click Computer, click Manage, and then click Disk Management. NOTE: If the HP Recovery partition is not listed, you must recover your operating system and programs using the Windows 7 operating system media and the Driver Recovery media. For additional information, see Using Windows 7 operating system media on page 117. 3. If the HP Recovery partition is listed, restart the computer, and then press esc while the "Press the ESC key for Startup Menu" message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. 4. Press f11 while the "Press <F11> for recovery" message is displayed on the screen. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions. Using Windows 7 operating system media If you cannot use the recovery media you previously created using the HP Recovery Disc Creator (select products only), you must purchase a Windows 7 operating system DVD to reboot the computer and repair the operating system. To order a Windows 7 operating system DVD, go to the HP website. For U.S. support, go to http://www.hp.com/support. For worldwide support, go to http://welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/ wwcontact_us.html. You can also order the DVD by calling support. For contact information, see the Worldwide Telephone Numbers booklet included with the computer. CAUTION: Using a Windows 7 operating system DVD completely erases hard drive contents and reformats the hard drive. All files that you have created and any software that you have installed on the computer are permanently removed. When reformatting is complete, the recovery process helps you restore the operating system, as well as drivers, software, and utilities. Performing a system recovery 117
  • 128. To initiate recovery using a Windows 7 operating system DVD: NOTE: This process takes several minutes. 1. If possible, back up all personal files. 2. Restart the computer, and then insert the Windows 7 operating system DVD into the optical drive before the Windows operating system loads. 3. When prompted, press any keyboard key. 4. Follow the on-screen instructions. 5. Click Next. 6. Select Repair your computer. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions. After the repair is completed: 1. Eject the Windows 7 operating system DVD and then insert the Driver Recovery DVD. 2. Install the Hardware Enabling Drivers first, and then install Recommended Applications. 118 Chapter 13 Backup and recovery in Windows 7
  • 129. 14 Specifications Computer specifications 15" products 14" products Dimensions Width 378 (14.88 in) 340 (13.39 in) Depth 257 (10.11 in) 237 (9.33 in) Height (front to back) 27.4 (1.07 in) 27 (1.06 in) Weight 5.1 or 5.37 lbs(depending on configuration) 4.3 or 4.57 lbs (depending on configuration) Input power Operating voltage and current 19.5 V dc @ 2.3 – 45 W (select products only) 19.5 V dc @ 3.33 A – 65 W 19 V dc @ 4.6 A – 90 W (only for products with an Intel quad- core processor) Temperature Operating 5°C to 35°C (41°F to 95°F) Nonoperating –20°C to 60°C (–4°F to 140°F) Relative humidity (noncondensing) Operating 10% to 90% Nonoperating 5% to 95% Maximum altitude (unpressurized) Operating –15 m to 3,048 m (–50 ft to 10,000 ft) Nonoperating –15 m to 12,192 m (–50 ft to 40,000 ft) NOTE: Applicable product safety standards specify thermal limits for plastic surfaces. The device operates well within this range of temperatures. Computer specifications 119
  • 130. Hard drive specifications 1-TB, 5400-rpm SATA* 750-GB, 5400-rpm Hybrid SATA 8GB NAND ** 500-GB, 7200-rpm FIPS SATA Opal2 ** 500-GB, 7200-rpm SATA ** 500-GB, 7200-rpm self- encrypting SATA Opal2 ** Dimensions Height 7.2 mm (0.28 in) Width 69.85 mm (2.75 in) Weight 99 g max Interface type SATA Transfer rate Synchronous (maximum) 600 MB/s Security ATA security Seek times (typical read, including setting) Single track 1.5 ms Average (read/write) 12.0 ms Maximum 22 ms Logical blocks 1,953,525,168 976,773,168 Disk rotational speed 5400 rpm 7200 rpm Operating temperature 0°C to 60°C (32°F to 140°F) *1 TB = 1 trillion bytes when referring to hard drive storage capacity. Actual accessible capacity is less. **1 GB = 1 billion bytes when referring to hard drive storage capacity. Actual accessible capacity is less. NOTE: Certain restrictions and exclusions apply. Contact technical support for details. Solid-state drive specifications 128 GB 2280 M2 SATA-3 TLC* 180 GB 2280 M2 SATA-3 MLC* 180 GB 2280 M2 SATA-3 self- encryptin g MLC (Opal 2 * 240 GB 2280 M2 SATA-3 MLC* 256 GB 2280 M2 PCIe-3x4 NVMe MLC* 256 GB 2280 M2 SATA-3 self- encryptin g MLC (Opal 2)* 256 GB 2280 M2 SATA-3 TLC* 512 GB SATA - 3 TLC* Dimensions Weight 10 g Height 2.38 mm (0.09 in) Width 22 mm (0.87 in) Interface type SATA Gen 3.0 (6 Gb/s) 120 Chapter 14 Specifications
  • 131. 128 GB 2280 M2 SATA-3 TLC* 180 GB 2280 M2 SATA-3 MLC* 180 GB 2280 M2 SATA-3 self- encryptin g MLC (Opal 2 * 240 GB 2280 M2 SATA-3 MLC* 256 GB 2280 M2 PCIe-3x4 NVMe MLC* 256 GB 2280 M2 SATA-3 self- encryptin g MLC (Opal 2)* 256 GB 2280 M2 SATA-3 TLC* 512 GB SATA - 3 TLC* Performance Maximum sequential read Up to 540 MB/s Up to 540 MB/s (Compress ible Performan ce) Up to 540 MB/s (Compress ible Performa nce) Up to 540 MB/s (Compress ible Performan ce) Up to 2260 MB/s Up to 540 MB/s Up to 540 MB/s Up to 540 MB/s Maximum sequential write Up to 300 MB/s Up to 490 MB/s (Compress ible Performan ce) Up to 490 MB/s (Compress ible Performa nce) Up to 490 MB/s (Compress ible Performan ce) Up to 1260 MB/s Up to 460 MB/s Up to 455 MB/s Up to 500 MB/s Security ATA-8 security Logical blocks 250,069,68 0 351,651,8 88 351,651,8 88 468,862,1 28 500,118,19 2 500,118,1 92 500,118,1 92 1,000,215, 216 Operating temperature 0°C to 70° C (32° F to 158° F) [ambient temp] Features DIPM; TRIM; DVESLP DIPM; TRIM; DEVSLP TCG OPAL 2.x; DIPM; TRIM; DEVSLP TCG OPAL 2.x; DIPM; TRIM; DEVSLP PCIe Gen3x4 , TRIM, L1.2 TCG OPAL 2.x, DIPM; TRIM; DEVSLP DIPM; TRIM; DEVSLP DIPM; TRIM; DEVSLP *1 TB = 1 trillion bytes when referring to hard drive storage capacity. Actual accessible capacity is less. NOTE: Certain restrictions and exclusions apply. Contact technical support for details. Solid-state drive specifications 121
  • 132. 15 Power cord set requirements The wide-range input feature of the computer permits it to operate from any line voltage from 100 to 120 volts AC, or from 220 to 240 volts AC. The 3-conductor power cord set included with the computer meets the requirements for use in the country or region where the equipment is purchased. Power cord sets for use in other countries and regions must meet the requirements of the country or region where the computer is used. Requirements for all countries The following requirements are applicable to all countries and regions: ● The length of the power cord set must be at least 1.0 m (3.3 ft) and no more than 2.0 m (6.5 ft). ● All power cord sets must be approved by an acceptable accredited agency responsible for evaluation in the country or region where the power cord set will be used. ● The power cord sets must have a minimum current capacity of 10 amps and a nominal voltage rating of 125 or 250 V AC, as required by the power system of each country or region. ● The appliance coupler must meet the mechanical configuration of an EN 60 320/IEC 320 Standard Sheet C13 connector for mating with the appliance inlet on the back of the computer. Requirements for specific countries and regions Country/region Accredited agency Applicable note number Australia EANSW 1 Austria OVE 1 Belgium CEBC 1 Canada CSA 2 Denmark DEMKO 1 Finland FIMKO 1 France UTE 1 Germany VDE 1 Italy IMQ 1 Japan METI 3 The Netherlands KEMA 1 Norway NEMKO 1 The People's Republic of China COC 5 South Korea EK 4 122 Chapter 15 Power cord set requirements
  • 133. Country/region Accredited agency Applicable note number Sweden SEMKO 1 Switzerland SEV 1 Taiwan BSMI 4 The United Kingdom BSI 1 The United States UL 2 1. The flexible cord must be Type HO5VV-F, 3-conductor, 1.0-mm conductor size. Power cord set fittings (appliance coupler and wall plug) must bear the certification mark of the agency responsible for evaluation in the country or region where it will be used. 2. The flexible cord must be Type SPT-3 or equivalent, No. 18 AWG, 3-conductor. The wall plug must be a two-pole grounding type with a NEMA 5-15P (15 A, 125 V) or NEMA 6-15P (15 A, 250 V) configuration. 3. The appliance coupler, flexible cord, and wall plug must bear a T mark and registration number in accordance with the Japanese Dentori Law. The flexible cord must be Type VCT or VCTF, 3-conductor, 1.00-mm conductor size. The wall plug must be a two- pole grounding type with a Japanese Industrial Standard C8303 (7 A, 125 V) configuration. 4. The flexible cord must be Type RVV, 3-conductor, 0.75-mm conductor size. Power cord set fittings (appliance coupler and wall plug) must bear the certification mark of the agency responsible for evaluation in the country or region where it will be used. 5. The flexible cord must be Type VCTF, 3-conductor, 0.75-mm conductor size. Power cord set fittings (appliance coupler and wall plug) must bear the certification mark of the agency responsible for evaluation in the country or region where it will be used. Requirements for specific countries and regions 123
  • 134. 16 Statement of memory volatility The purpose of this chapter is to provide general information regarding nonvolatile memory in HP Business PCs. This chapter also provides general instructions for restoring nonvolatile memory that can contain personal data after the system has been powered off and the hard drive has been removed. HP Business PC products that use Intel -based or AMD -based system boards contain volatile DDR memory. The amount of nonvolatile memory present in the system depends upon the system configuration. Intel- based and AMD-based system boards contain nonvolatile memory subcomponents as originally shipped from HP, assuming that no subsequent modifications have been made to the system and assuming that no applications, features, or functionality have been added to or installed on the system. Following system shutdown and removal of all power sources from an HP Business PC system, personal data can remain on volatile system memory (DIMMs) for a finite period of time and will also remain in nonvolatile memory. Use the steps below to remove personal data from the PC, including the nonvolatile memory found in Intel-based and AMD-based system boards. NOTE: If your tablet has a keyboard base, connect to the keyboard base before beginning steps in this chapter. Current BIOS steps 1. Follow steps (a) through (l) below to restore the nonvolatile memory that can contain personal data. Restoring or reprogramming nonvolatile memory that does not store personal data is neither necessary nor recommended. a. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the “Press the ESC key for Startup Menu” “message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. IMPORTANT: If the Main menu displays Restore Defaults instead of Apply Factory Defaults and Exit, go to Legacy BIOS Steps on page 125. NOTE: If the system has a BIOS administrator password, enter the password at the prompt. b. Select Main, select Apply Factory Defaults and Exit, and then select Yes to load defaults. The computer will reboot. c. During the reboot, press esc while the Press the ESC key for Startup Menu message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. NOTE: If the system has a BIOS administrator password, enter the password at the prompt. d. Select the Security menu, select Restore Security Settings to Factory Defaults, and then select Yes to restore security level defaults. The computer will reboot. e. During the reboot, press esc while the “Press the ESC key for Startup Menu” message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. NOTE: If the system has a BIOS administrator password, enter the password at the prompt. f. If an asset or ownership tag is set, select the Security menu and scroll down to the Utilities menu. Select System IDs, and then select Asset Tracking Number. Clear the tag, and then make the selection to return to the prior menu. 124 Chapter 16 Statement of memory volatility
  • 135. g. If a DriveLock password is set, select the Security menu, and scroll down to Hard Drive Utilities under the Utilities menu. Select Hard Drive Utilities, select DriveLock, then uncheck the checkbox for DriveLock password on restart. Select OK to proceed. h. Select the Main menu, and then select Reset BIOS Security to factory default. Click Yes at the warning message. The computer will reboot. i. During the reboot, press esc while the “Press the ESC key for Startup Menu” message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. NOTE: If the system has a BIOS administrator password, enter the password at the prompt. j. Select the Main menu, select Apply Factory Defaults and Exit, select Yes to save changes and exit, and then select Shutdown. k. Reboot the system. If the system has a Trusted Platform Module (TPM) and/or fingerprint reader, one or two prompts will appear one to clear the TPM and the other to Reset Fingerprint Sensor; press or tap F1 to accept or F2 to reject. l. Remove all power and system batteries for at least 24 hours. 2. Complete one of the following: ● Remove and retain the storage drive. – or – ● Clear the drive contents by using a third party utility designed to erase data from an SSD. – or – ● Clear the contents of the drive by using the following BIOS Setup Secure Erase command option steps: IMPORTANT: If you clear data using Secure Erase, it cannot be recovered. a. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the “Press the ESC key for Startup Menu” “message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. b. Select the Security menu and scroll down to the Utilities menu. c. Select Hard Drive Tools. d. Under Utilities, select Secure Erase, select the hard drive storing the data you want to clear, and then follow the on-screen instructions to continue. Legacy BIOS Steps Use the steps for older versions of BIOS. NOTE: If you already completed the steps in Current BIOS steps on page 124, skip this section. 1. Follow steps (a) through (i) below to restore the nonvolatile memory that can contain personal data. Restoring or reprogramming nonvolatile memory that does not store personal data is neither necessary nor recommended. NOTE: If you have not already done so, access the BIOS menu. ● Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the “Press the ESC key for Startup Menu” “message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. 125
  • 136. NOTE: If the system has a BIOS administrator password, enter the password at the prompt. a. Select Main, select Restore Defaults, and then select Yes to load defaults. b. Select the Security menu, select Restore Security Level Defaults, and then select Yes to restore security level defaults. c. If an asset or ownership tag is set, select the Security menu and scroll down to the Utilities menu. Select System IDs, and then select Asset Tracking Number. Clear the tag, and then make the selection to return to the prior menu. d. If a DriveLock password is set, select the Security menu, and scroll down to Hard Drive Tools under the Utilities menu. Select Hard Drive Tools, select DriveLock, then uncheck the checkbox for DriveLock password on restart. Select OK to proceed. e. If an Automatic DriveLock password is set, select the Security menu, scroll down to Hard Drive Tools under the Utilities menu. Select Hard Drive Tools, scroll down to Automatic DriveLock, then select the desired hard drive and disable protection. At the automatic drive lock warning screen, select Yes to continue. Repeat this procedure if more than one hard drive has an Automatic DriveLock password. f. Select the Main menu, and then select Reset BIOS Security to factory default. Click Yes at the warning message. g. Select the Main menu, select Save Changes and Exit, select Yes to save changes and exit, and then select Shutdown. h. Reboot the system. If the system has a Trusted Platform Module (TPM) and/or fingerprint reader, one or two prompts will appear, one to clear the TPM and the other to Reset Fingerprint Sensor; press or tap F1 to accept or F2 to reject. i. Remove all power and system batteries for at least 24 hours. 2. Complete one of the following: ● Remove and retain the storage drive. – or – ● Clear the drive contents by using a third party utility designed to erase data from an SSD. – or – ● Clear the contents of the drive by using the following BIOS Setup Secure Erase command option steps: IMPORTANT: If you clear data using Secure Erase, it cannot be recovered. a. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the “Press the ESC key for Startup Menu” “message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. b. Select the Security menu and scroll down to the Utilities menu. c. Select Hard Drive Tools. d. Under Utilities, select Secure Erase, select the hard drive storing the data you want to clear, and then follow the on-screen instructions to continue. – or – ● Clear the contents of the drive by using the following Disk Sanitizer command steps: IMPORTANT: If you clear data using Disk Sanitizer, it cannot be recovered. 126 Chapter 16 Statement of memory volatility
  • 137. NOTE: The amount of time it takes for Disk Sanitizer to run can take several hours. Plug the computer into an AC outlet before starting. a. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the “Press the ESC key for Startup Menu” “message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. b. Select the Security menu and scroll down to the Utilities menu. c. Select Hard Drive Tools. d. Under Utilities, select Disk Sanitizer, select the hard drive storing the data you want to clear, and then follow the on-screen instructions to continue. 127
  • 138. Nonvolatile memory usage Nonvolatile Memory Type Amount (Size) Does this memory store customer data? Does this memory retain data when power is removed? What is the purpose of this memory? How is data input into this memory? How is this memory write-protected? HP Sure Start flash (select models only) 2 MBytes No Yes Provides protected backup of critical System BIOS code, EC firmware, and critical PC configuration data for select platforms that support HP Sure Start. For more information, see Using HP Sure Start (select models only) on page 131. Data cannot be written to this device via the host processor. The content is managed solely by the HP Sure Start Embedded Controller. This memory is protected by the HP Sure Start Embedded Controller. Real Time Clock (RTC) battery backed-up CMOS configuration memory 256 Bytes No Yes Stores system date and time and noncritical data. RTC battery backed-up CMOS is programmed using the Computer Setup (BIOS), or changing the Microsoft Windows date & time. This memory is not write- protected. Controller (NIC) EEPROM 64 KBytes (not customer accessible) No Yes Stores NIC configuration and NIC firmware. NIC EEPROM is programmed using a utility from the NIC vendor that can be run from DOS. A utility is required to write data to this memory and is available from the NIC vendor. Writing data to this ROM in an inappropriate manner will render the NIC non- functional. DIMM Serial Presence Detect (SPD) configuration data 256 Bytes per memory module, 128 Bytes programmable (not customer accessible) No Yes Stores memory module information. DIMM SPD is programmed by the memory vendor. Data cannot be written to this memory when the module is installed in a PC. The specific write- protection method varies by memory vendor. System BIOS 4 MBytes to 5 MBytes Yes Yes Stores system BIOS code and PC configuration data. System BIOS code is programmed at the factory. Code is updated when the system BIOS is updated. Configuration data and settings are input using the Computer Setup (BIOS) or a custom utility. NOTE: Writing data to this ROM in an inappropriate manner can render the PC non- functional. A utility is required for writing data to this memory and is available on the HP website; go to http://www.hp.com/ support. Select Find your product, and then follow 128 Chapter 16 Statement of memory volatility
  • 139. Nonvolatile Memory Type Amount (Size) Does this memory store customer data? Does this memory retain data when power is removed? What is the purpose of this memory? How is data input into this memory? How is this memory write-protected? the on-screen instructions. Intel Management Engine Firmware (present in only specific ZBook and EliteBook models. For more information, go to http://www.hp.com/ support. Select Find your product, and then follow the on- screen instructions.) 1.5 MBytes or 5 MBytes Yes Yes Stores Management Engine Code, Settings, Provisioning Data and iAMT third-party data store. Management Engine Code is programmed at the factory. Code is updated via Intel secure firmware update utility. Unique Provisioning Data can be entered at the factory or by an administrator using the Management Engine (MEBx) setup utility. The third party data store contents can be populated by a remote management console or local applications that have been registered by an administrator to have access to the space. The Intel chipset is configured to enforce hardware protection to block all direct read/write access to this area. An Intel utility is required for updating the firmware. Only firmware updates digitally signed by Intel can be applied using this utility. Bluetooth flash 2 Mbit No Yes Stores Bluetooth configuration and firmware. Bluetooth flash is programmed at the factory. Tools for writing data to this memory are not publicly available but can be obtained from the silicon vendor. A utility is required for writing data to this memory and is made available through newer versions of the driver whenever the flash requires an upgrade. 802.11 WLAN EEPROM 4 Kbit to 8 Kbit No Yes Stores configuration and calibration data. 802.11 WLAN EEPROM is programmed at the factory. Tools for writing data to this memory are not made public. A utility is required for writing data to this memory and is typically not made available to the public unless a firmware upgrade is necessary to address a unique issue. Web camera 64 Kbit No Yes Stores webcam configuration and firmware. Webcam memory is programmed using a utility from the device manufacturer that can be run from Windows. A utility is required for writing data to this memory and is typically not made available to the public unless a firmware upgrade is necessary to address a unique issue. Fingerprint reader 512 KByte flash Yes Yes Stores fingerprint templates. Fingerprint reader memory is programmed by user enrollment in HP ProtectTools Security Manager. Only a digitally signed application can make the call to write to the flash. Nonvolatile memory usage 129
  • 140. Questions and answers 1. How can the BIOS settings be restored (returned to factory settings)? IMPORTANT: Restore defaults does not securely erase any data on your hard drive. See question and answer 6 for steps to securely erase data. Restore defaults does not reset the Custom Secure Boot keys. See question and answer 7 for information about resetting the keys. a. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the “Press the ESC key for Startup Menu” “message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. b. Select Main, and then select Restore defaults. c. Follow the on-screen instructions. d. Select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 2. What is a UEFI BIOS, and how is it different from a legacy BIOS? The Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) BIOS is an industry-standard software interface between the platform firmware and an operating system (OS). It is a replacement for the older BIOS architecture, but supports much of the legacy BIOS functionality. Like the legacy BIOS, the UEFI BIOS provides an interface to display the system information and configuration settings and to change the configuration of your computer before an OS is loaded. BIOS provides a secure run-time environment that supports a Graphic User Interface (GUI). In this environment, you can use either a pointing device (Touchscreen, TouchPad, pointing stick, or USB mouse) or the keyboard to navigate and make menu and configuration selections. The UEFI BIOS also contains basic system diagnostics. The UEFI BIOS provides functionality beyond that of the legacy BIOS. In addition, the UEFI BIOS works to initialize the computer’s hardware before loading and executing the OS; the run-time environment allows the loading and execution of software programs from storage devices to provide more functionality, such as advanced hardware diagnostics (with the ability to display more detailed system information) and advanced firmware management and recovery software. HP has provided options in Computer Setup (BIOS) to allow you to run in legacy BIOS, if required by the operating system. Examples of this requirement would be if you upgrade or downgrade the OS. 3. Where does the UEFI BIOS reside? The UEFI BIOS resides on a flash memory chip. A utility is required to write to the chip. 4. What kind of configuration data is stored on the DIMM Serial Presence Detect (SPD) memory module? How would this data be written? The DIMM SPD memory contains information about the memory module, such as size, serial number, data width, speed/timing, voltage, and thermal information. This information is written by the module manufacturer and stored on an EEPROM. This EEPROM cannot be written to when the memory module is installed in a PC. Third-party tools do exist that can write to the EEPROM when the memory module is not installed in a PC. Various third-party tools are available to read SPD memory. 5. What is meant by “Restore the nonvolatile memory found in Intel-based system boards”? This message relates to clearing the Real Time Clock (RTC) CMOS memory that contains PC configuration data. 6. How can the BIOS security be reset to factory defaults and data erased? 130 Chapter 16 Statement of memory volatility
  • 141. IMPORTANT: Resetting will result in the loss of information. These steps will not reset Custom Secure Boot Keys. See question and answer 7 for information about resetting the keys. a. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the “Press the ESC key for Startup Menu” “message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. b. Select Main, and then select Reset BIOS Security to Factory Default. c. Follow the on-screen instructions. d. Select Main, select Save Changes and Exit, and then follow the on-screen instructions. 7. How can the Custom Secure Boot Keys be reset? Secure Boot is a feature to ensure that only authenticated code can start on a platform. If you enabled Secure Boot and created Custom Secure Boot Keys, simply disabling Secure Boot will not clear the keys. You must also select to clear the Custom Secure Boot Keys. Use the same Secure Boot access procedure you used to create the Custom Secure Boot Keys, but make the selection to clear or delete all Secure Boot Keys. a. Turn on or restart the computer, and then press esc while the “Press the ESC key for Startup Menu” “message is displayed at the bottom of the screen. b. Select the Security menu, select Secure Boot Configuration, and then follow the on-screen instructions. c. At the Secure Boot Configuration window, select Secure Boot, select Clear Secure Boot Keys, and then follow the on-screen instructions to continue. Using HP Sure Start (select models only) Select computer models are configured with HP Sure Start, a technology that continuously monitors your computer's BIOS for attacks or corruption. If the BIOS becomes corrupted or is attacked, HP Sure Start restores the BIOS to its previously safe state, without user intervention. Those select computer models ship with HP Sure Start configured and enabled. HP Sure Start is configured and already enabled so that most users can use the HP Sure Start default configuration. The default configuration can be customized by advanced users. To access the latest documentation on HP Sure Start, go to http://www.hp.com/support. Select Find your product, and then follow the on-screen instructions. Using HP Sure Start (select models only) 131
  • 142. 17 Recycling When a non-rechargeable or rechargeable battery has reached the end of its useful life, do not dispose of the battery in general household waste. Follow the local laws and regulations in your area for battery disposal. HP encourages customers to recycle used electronic hardware, HP original print cartridges, and rechargeable batteries. For more information about recycling programs, see the HP Web site at http://www.hp.com/recycle. 132 Chapter 17 Recycling
  • 143. Index A AC adapter, spare part numbers 31 Antenna Kit, spare part numbers 31 audio board removal 78 spare part number 25, 78 spare part numbers 78 audio, product description 3 audio-out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo jack, identifying 6 B back cover spare part number 28 Backup and Restore 116 backup tools 114 backups 105 creating 115 recovering 116 Base enclosure removal 57 base enclosure spare part number 25 battery removal 38 spare part number 26 spare part numbers 38 battery light 18 bezel spare part number 27 BIOS determining version 90, 95, 100 downloading an update 90, 95, 100 updating 90, 95, 100 boot order changing 109 buttons left pointing stick 10 left TouchPad 10 optical drive eject 8 power 12 right pointing stick 10 right TouchPad 10 C Cable Kit, spare part numbers 31 caps lock light, identifying 11 chipset, product description 1 components bottom 17 display 9 front 17 left side 8 rear 19 right side 6 top 10 computer major components 21 Computer Setup navigating and selecting 88, 93, 98 restoring factory settings 89, 94, 99 computer specifications 119 connector, power 7 D Display assembly spare part numbers 22, 23 display assembly subcomponents 27 display assembly components removal 82 spare part numbers 82 display bezel removal 83 spare part numbers 82, 83 display cable, spare part number 28 display panel product description 1 removal 83 spare part number 82 spare part numbers 83 docking product description 4 docking port, identifying 7 docking station support holes, identifying 17 drive light 18 Driver Recovery DVD, creating 114 using for restore 117 Dual-Mode DisplayPort, identifying 6 E embedded numeric keypad, identifying 14 esc key, identifying 14, 15 Ethernet, product description 3 external monitor port 19 F f11 recovery 112, 117 fan spare part numbers 23 fan and heat sink assembly spare part numbers 61 Ffan and heat sink assembly removal 61 fingerprint reader removal 72 spare part numbers 72 fingerprint reader, identifying 13 fn key, identifying 14, 15 G graphics, product description 1 H hard drive product description 2 removal 39 spare part number 25, 30 spare part numbers 39 specifications 120 hard drive hardware kit spare part number 30 hard drive recovery 112, 117 heat sink spare part numbers 23 hinge spare part number 27, 28 Index 133
  • 144. hinge brackets removal 85 hinge cover removal 55 spare part numbers 55 Hinge Kit spare part number 28 hot keys microphone mute 16 using 15 HP PC Hardware Diagnostics (UEFI) using 103 HP Recovery Disc Creator, using 114 HP Recovery Manager correcting boot problems 109 starting 108 HP Recovery media creating 105 recovery 108 HP Recovery partition checking for presence 117 recovery 108 removing 110 using for recovery 117 HP Sure Start 131 I integrated numeric keypad, identifying 15 integrated webcam light, identifying 9 internal microphones, identifying 9 J jacks audio-out (headphone)/audio-in (microphone) combo 6 network 7 RJ-45 (network) 7 K Keyboard spare part numbers 23 keyboard product description 4 remval 48 spare part numbers 48 keypad embedded numeric 14 integrated numeric 15 keys esc 14, 15 fn 14, 15 Windows application 14 Windows key 14, 15 L labels serial number 19 legacy support, USB 88, 93, 98 lights battery 18 caps lock 11 drive 18 microphone mute 11 num lock 11 power 11, 17 RJ-45 (network) 7 webcam 9 wireless 11, 17 M memory nonvolatile 124 removal 51 spare part number 25 spare part numbers 51 volatile 124 memory card reader, identifying 7 memory module product description 2 microphone product description 3 microphone board removal 86 microphone mute key, identifying 16 microphone mute light, identifying 11 minimized image recovery 108 minimized image, creating 107 model name 1 N near field communication (NFC) cable spare part number 76 near field communication (NFC) module spare part number 76 network jack, identifying 7 NFC removal 76 spare part numbers 76 NFC antenna, identifying 9 NFC antennas, identifying 9 nonvolatile memory 124 num lock light 11 O operating system, product description 4 optical drive product description 3 removal 46 spare part number 26 spare part numbers 30, 46 optical drive board removal 64 spare part number 25 spare part numbers 64 optical drive eject button, identifying 8 optical drive light, identifying 8 optical drive, identifying 8 optical drive/Blu-ray combo spare part number 25, 30, 46, 51 optical drive/DVD combo spare part number 30, 46 original system recovery 107 P panel spare part number 28 plastics kit, spare part numbers 31 pointing device, product description 4 pointing stick 10 ports Dual-Mode DisplayPort 6 external monitor 19 product description 3 serial 19 USB 3.0 charging (powered) 6 USB Type-C (charging) 7 power button board removal 71 spare part number 23 spare part numbers 25, 71 power button, identifying 12 134 Index
  • 145. power connector, identifying 7 power cord set requirements 122 power lights 11, 17 power requirements, product description 4 processor product description 1 product description audio 3 chipset 1 display panel 1 docking 4 Ethernet 3 external media cards 3 graphics 1 hard drive 2 keyboard 4 memory module 2 microphone 3 operating system 4 optical drive 3 pointing device 4 ports 3 power requirements 4 processors 1 product name 1 security 4 serviceability 5 solid-state drive 2 video 3 wireless 3 product name 1 product name and number, computer 19 R recover options 107 recovery 113 discs 106, 108 HP Recovery Manager 107 media 108 starting 108 supported discs 106 system 107 USB flash drive 108 using HP Recovery media 106 recovery media creating 105 creating using HP Recovery Manager 106 recovery media, creating 114 recovery media, using for restore 117 recovery partition 112, 117 removing 110 recovery tools 114 recovery tools, Windows 116 recovery, system 116 refresh 113 regulatory information 19 removal/replacement procedures 37, 54 removing personal data from volatile system memory 124 reset 113 restoring the hard drive 112, 117 RJ-45 (network) jack, identifying 7 RJ-45 (network) lights, identifying 7 RTC battery removal 68 spare part number 23 spare part numbers 68 Rubber Kit, spare part number 31 S Screw Kit, spare part numbers 31 security cable slot, identifying 8 security, product description 4 serial removal 80 spare part number 80 spare part numbers 80 serial number 19 serial number, computer 19 serial port spare part number 25 serial port, identifying 19 service door removal 37 spare part number 26, 37 service door, spare part number 37 serviceability, product description 5 setup utility navigating and selecting 88, 93, 98 restoring factory settings 89, 94, 99 SIM card slot, identifying 6 slots security cable 8 smart card 8 smart card reader removal 74 spare part numbers 74 smart card reader board spare part number 23 smart card slot 8 solid-state drive removal 41 spare part number 25, 29 spare part numbers 41 speaker removal 70 spare part number 25 spare part numbers 70 Speaker Kit, spare part number 31 speakers, identifying 12 specifications computer 119 hard drive 120 SSD product description 2 Startup Repair, using 116 supported discs, recovery 106 Sure Start using 92, 97, 102 system board removal 59 spare part number 24 spare part numbers 59 system information locating 19 system memory, removing personal data from volatile 124 system recovery 107 system restore point creating 106 system restore point, creating 105 Index 135
  • 146. T top cover removal 65 spare part numbers 23, 65 TouchPad buttons 10 removal 65 spare part number 23 spare part numbers 23, 65 TouchPad light, identifying 10 TouchPad zone identifying 10 TPM settings 91, 96, 101 U USB 3.0 charging (powered), identifying 6 USB 3.0 port 7 USB legacy support 88, 93, 98 USB ports, identifying 7 USB Type-C (charging) port, identifying 7 V vents, identifying 8, 17 video, product description 3 W warranty period 19 webcam 9 removal 86 webcam light, identifying 9 webcam, identifying 9 webcam/microphone module removal 86 Windows Refresh 113 Reset 113 system restore point 105, 106 Windows 7 operating system DVD creating 114 using for restore 117 Windows 7 operating system media creating 114 using for restore 117 Windows application key, identifying 14 Windows key, identifying 14, 15 Windows operating system DVD 113 Windows Startup Repair, using 116 Windows tools using 106 wireless antennas, identifying 9 wireless light 11, 17 wireless, product description 3 WLAN removal 44 spare part numbers 44 WLAN antenna cables removal 85 WLAN antennas, identifying 9 WLAN cable spare part number 28 WLAN cable, spare part number 28 WLAN module spare part number 25 WWAN removal 42 spare part numbers 42 WWAN antenna cables removal 86 WWAN antennas, identifying 9 WWAN cable spare part number 28 WWAN module (select products only) spare part number 25 136 Index